Contents

BMW 740i Sedan 7 Series 2013 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 255
1 of 255

Summary of Content for BMW 740i Sedan 7 Series 2013 Owner's Manual PDF

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

The Ultimate Driving Machine

THE BMW 7 SERIES. OWNER'S MANUAL.

Contents A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

7 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or Integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive. BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English XI/13, 07 13 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Addendum

ADDENDUM TO BMW 7 SERIES OWNERS MANUAL 1402926019

We wanted to provide you with some updates and clarifications with respect to the printed BMW Owners Manual. These updates and clarifications will supersede the materials contained in that document.

1. Where the terms service center, the service center, your service center, service specialist, or service are used in the Owners Manual, we wanted to clarify that the terms refer to a BMW dealers service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.

2. Where the text of the Owners Manual contains an affirmative instruction to contact a service center or your service center, we wanted to clarify that BMW recommends that, if you are faced with one of the situations addressed by that text, you contact or seek the assistance of a BMW dealers service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.

While BMW of North America LLC, at no cost to you, will pay for repairs required by the limited warranties provided with respect to your

vehicle and for maintenance under the Maintenance Program during the applicable warranty and maintenance coverage periods, you are free to elect, both during those periods and thereafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other service centers or repair shops.

3. Where the Owners Manual makes reference to parts and accessories having been approved by BMW, those references are intended to reflect that those parts and accessories are recommended by BMW of North America LLC. You may elect to use other parts and accessories, but, if you do, we recommend that you make sure that any such parts and/or accessories are appropriate for use on your vehicle.

4. At page 7, under the Parts and Accessories section, in the sixth sentence, the word cannot should read does not.

5. At page 55, in the Checking and replacing safety belts section, the text beginning, Have the work performed only by your service center . . . should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: BMW recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is important that this safety feature functions properly.

Addendum

6. At page 55, under the heading: Active head restraint, the paragraph beginning, Only attach accessories . . . should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: BMW recommends that you attach accessories approved by BMW to the seat or head restraint.

7. At page 158, under the heading: Special windshield, the paragraph beginning, Therefore, have the special windshield . . . should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: BMW recommends that you have the special windshield replaced by the service center.

8. At page 184 under the heading: Objects in the area around the pedals and at page 233 under the heading: Carpets and floor mats, the paragraph that begins: Only use floor mats . . . should be disregarded and the following language should be read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use floor mats that have been identified by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle and that can be properly fixed in place.

9. At page 189, under the heading: Have maintenance carried out, the sentence beginning, Have the maintenance carried out . . . should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: BMW recommends that you have the maintenance carried out by your service center.

10. At page 206, under the heading: Mounting, the paragraph beginning, Have mounting and balancing . . . should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: BMW recommends that you have mounting and balancing performed by your service center or a tire mounting specialist.

11. At page 207, under the heading: Approved wheels and tires, the term Approved should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, the term Recommended should be read in its place. In addition, the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non- recommended wheels and tires to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle.

12. At page 208, under the heading: Snow Chains, the text should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:

Addendum

Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle and are determined by the manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe and are recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.

Information about recommended snow chains is available from a service center.

13. At page 210, under the heading Hood, the sentence beginning, If you are unfamiliar should be disregarded.

14. At page 213, under the heading: Approved oil types, the references to Approved should be read as Suitable. Immediately preceding the Gasoline engine chart, the following sentence should be inserted: Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards: . . . The reference to BMW High Performance SAE 5W- 30 should be disregarded.

15. At page 213, under the heading: Alternative oil types, the text preceding the chart should be disregarded, and in lieu thereof should be read as follows: If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added: . . . The reference to specification should be read as rating.

16. At page 214, under the heading: Engine oil change, the text should

be disregarded and in lieu thereof should be read as follows:

BMW recommends that you have the oil changed at your BMW dealers service center or at another service center that has trained personnel that can perform the work in accordance with BMW specifications

17. At page 216 under the heading: Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models, the second paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have maintenance and repair performed by your BMW dealers service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you maintain records of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle.

18. At page 219 and page 220, where it reads: Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps, that text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read: Xenon headlamp work or replacement can cause serious and fatal injuries. In the

Addendum

text that follows, where it reads: [h]ave any work on the xenon lighting system . . . , the following words should be read as preceding that passage: It is strongly suggested that you . . . .

19. At page 223, under the Battery replacement section, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read:

Use of recommended vehicle batteries

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available.

After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that any check control messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 240.

6 Notes

At a glance 12 Cockpit 16 iDrive 23 Voice activation system 26 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Controls 30 Opening and closing 48 Adjusting 62 Transporting children safely 66 Driving 79 Displays 95 Lamps 100 Safety 125 Driving stability control systems 133 Driving comfort 160 Climate control 168 Interior equipment 176 Storage compartments

Driving tips 182 Things to remember when driving 185 Loading 188 Saving fuel

Mobility 196 Refueling 198 Fuel 199 Wheels and tires 210 Engine compartment 212 Engine oil 215 Coolant 216 Maintenance 218 Replacing components 225 Breakdown assistance 230 Care

Reference 236 Technical data 240 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Notes Using this Owner's Manual The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap pendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

User's manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com munication and the short commands of the voice activation system are described in a sep arate user's manual, which is also included with the onboard literature.

Additional sources of information Should you have any questions, your service center will be glad to advise you at any time. Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the ve hicle. Marks the end of a specific item of informa tion. "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se lect individual functions.

... Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac tivation system. ... Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rele

vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor mation on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment is also described and illustrated that is not available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or the country- specific variants. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. For options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup plementary Owner's Manuals. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illus trations.

Status of the Owner's Manual The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de

Seite 6

Notes

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap pendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

For your own safety Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair methods. Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri ately trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Parts and Accessories

California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo bile components and parts, including compo nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re lated accessories contain lead and lead com pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties:

Seite 7

Notes

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

BMW recommends using parts and accessories approved by BMW for this

Your BMW center is the right contact for genuine BMW parts and accessories, other products approved by BMW and related qualified advice. BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles. BMW can assume responsibility for them. However, we cannot assume any responsibility whatsoever for parts and accessories that have not been specifically approved by BMW.

BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard. This guarantee is also not applicable when country-specific government approval has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential operating conditions to which components might be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's own stringent quality standards.

purpose.

New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. Federal Emissions System Defect War

ranty. Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. California Emission Control System Lim

ited Warranty. Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your ve hicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Specifications for required maintenance meas ures: BMW Maintenance system Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in seri ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Data memory Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that tempo rarily or permanently store technical informa tion about the condition of the vehicle, events and faults. This technical information generally documents the state of a component, a mod ule, a system or the environment: Operating states of system components,

fill levels for instance. Status messages for the vehicle and from

its individual components, e.g., wheel rota tion speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration.

Malfunctions and faults in important sys tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.

Responses by the vehicle to special situa tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en gagement of stability control systems.

Ambient conditions, such as temperature. This data is purely technical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to opti mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re pair services, service processes, warranty claims, quality assurance, this technical infor mation can be read out from the event and fault memories by the service personnel, in cluding the manufacturer, using special diag nostic tools. You can obtain further information there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected, the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continuous basis. When the vehicle is in use, situations are con ceivable in which it might be possible to asso ciate this technical data with individuals if it is combined with other information, e.g., an acci dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye wit ness accounts possibly with the assistance of an expert. Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo

Seite 8

Notes

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle data to be transmitted from the vehicle.

Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under standing how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were

operating. Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were fastened. How far, if at all, the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal. How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac quired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in jury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehi cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Seite 9

Notes

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

At a glance These overviews of buttons, switches and

displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Cockpit Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip

ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Seating comfort functions Gentleman function49

Seat, mirror, steering wheel memory57

Active seat50

2 Roller sunblind for rear window45 3 Safety switch for the windows and the

roller sunblind in the rear45 4 Power windows44 5 Exterior mirror operation58

6 Driver assistance systems Active Blind Spot Detec tion121

Intelligent Safety108

Lane departure warning119

Night Vision with pedestrian de tection116

Head-up Display157

Seite 12

At a glance Cockpit

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

7 Lamps Front fog lamps98

Parking lamps95

Low beams95

Automatic headlamp con trol96 Daytime running lights96 Adaptive Light Control96 High-beam Assistant97 Instrument lighting98

8 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal73

High beams, head lamp flasher73

High-beam Assistant97

Roadside parking lamps96

Computer91

9 Steering wheel buttons, left Store speed143,135

Resume speed144,136

Cruise control on/off, inter rupt143,134

Reducing distance133

Increasing distance133

Congestion Assistant ON/OFF, Pause139

Congestion Assistant: setting cruise control distance133

Cruise control rocker switch144135

10 Instrument cluster79 11 Steering wheel buttons, right

Entertainment source

Volume

Voice activation23

Telephone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication

Thumbwheel for selection lists90 12 Steering column stalk, right

Windshield wipers74

Rain sensor75

Clean the windshields and head lamps74

13 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off67

Auto Start/Stop function68

14 Horn 15 Steering wheel heating61

Seite 13

Cockpit At a glance

13 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

16 Adjust steering wheel60

17 Open the trunk lid37

18 Unlocking the hood

All around the center console

1 Headliner15 2 Control Display16 3 Glove compartment, top/bottom176 4 Air vent163 5 Hazard warning system225

Central locking system36

6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu nication

7 Automatic climate control160 8 Controller with buttons16

9 Parking brake70

Auto Hold72

10 PDC Park Distance Control145 Top View151 Rearview camera147 Parking assistant153 Side View149

HDC Hill Descent Control127

Seite 14

At a glance Cockpit

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

11 Dynamic Driving Control130

DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol130

12 Transmission selector lever

All around the headliner

1 Intelligent Emergency Re quest225

2 Glass sunroof, powered46

3 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbag102

4 Reading lamps99

5 Interior lamps99

Seite 15

Cockpit At a glance

15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

iDrive Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

The concept The iDrive combines the functions of a multi tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be operated from a central location.

Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and pos

ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other road users, never at tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.

Controls at a glance Controls

1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons and touchpad

The buttons can be used to open the me nus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings.

Control Display

Hints To clean the Control Display, follow the

care instructions. Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged.

Switching off

1. Press the button. 2. "Switch off control display"

Switching on Press the controller again to switch the screen back on.

Controller Select menu items and create settings. 1. Turn.

Seite 16

At a glance iDrive

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

2. Press.

3. Move in four directions.

Buttons on controller

Press the but ton

Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Operating concept Opening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".

Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. Move the controller to the left.

The current panel is closed and the previ ous panel is displayed. The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed.

Move the controller to the right.

Seite 17

iDrive At a glance

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

A new panel is opened on top of the previ ous display.

White arrows pointing to the left or right indi cate that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: Move the controller to the left repeatedly

until the first panel is displayed. Press the menu button on the controller

twice.

Opening the Options menu Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

Options menu The "Options" menu consists of various areas: Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".

This area remains unchanged. Control options for the selected main

menu, e.g., for "Radio". If applicable, further operating options for

the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Changing settings 1. Select a field. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is displayed.

3. Press the controller.

Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

The function is activated. The function is deactivated.

Touchpad Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller:

Selecting functions 1. "Settings" 2. "Touchpad" 3. Select the desired function.

"Speller": letters and numbers, enter ing.

"Map": operating the interactive map.

Seite 18

At a glance iDrive

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

"Browser": enter Internet addresses. "Audio feedback": the entered letters

and numbers are announced.

Entering letters and numbers The entry of the letters requires some practice at the beginning. In the entry, pay attention to the following: For the entry of large/small letters and

numbers, first convert via iDrive to the cor responding Input mode, refer to page 21.

Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display.

Always enter accompanying signs, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized.

To delete a character, slide to the left on the touchpad.

Operating the interactive map The interactive map in the navigation system can be moved via the touchpad.

Function Controls

Interactive map. Slide in the correspond ing direction.

Enlarge/shrink in teractive map.

Drag the display inwards or outwards with the fin gers.

Display menu. Tap once.

Changing settings Settings on the control display, such as the volume, can be made via the touchpad. To do this slide to the left or right accordingly.

Example: setting the clock Setting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high lighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date".

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high lighted, and then press the controller.

Seite 19

iDrive At a glance

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Status information Status field The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right: Time. Current entertainment source. Sound output, on/off. Wireless network reception strength. Telephone status. Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio is switched on.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Wireless network reception strength Symbol flashes: searching for network.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Roaming is active.

Symbol Meaning

Text message was received.

Check the SIM card.

SIM card is blocked.

SIM card is missing.

Enter the PIN.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player.

Music collection.

Gracenote database.

AUX-IN port.

Rear AUX-IN port on the left.

Rear AUX-IN port on the right.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are switched off.

Split screen General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the computer. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press the button.

Seite 20

At a glance iDrive

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is

selected. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen

content". 5. Select the desired menu item.

Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina tions, phone numbers and entry points into the menu. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Saving a function 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.

Running a function Press the button.

The function will run immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

To display short information: touch the button.

To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period.

Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for

approx. five seconds. 2. "OK"

Entering letters and numbers General information 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num

bers. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if

needed. 3. "OK": confirm the entry. Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers:

Seite 21

iDrive At a glance

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete the let ter or number.

Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.

Switching between cases, letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers:

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

or Move the controller up.

Without navigation system Select the symbol.

Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. Only those letters are offered during the

entry for which data is available. Destination search: town/city names can

be entered using the spelling of language available on the Control Display.

Seite 22

At a glance iDrive

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Voice activation system Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

The concept Most functions that are displayed on the

Control Display can be operated by spoken commands via the voice activation system. The system prompts you to make your en tries.

Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated using the voice activation system.

The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.

... Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation system.

Requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identi fied. Set the language, refer to page 93.

Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command.

The command is displayed in the instru ment cluster.

This symbol in the instrument cluster indi cates that the voice activation system is active. If no other commands are available, operate the function in this case via iDrive.

Terminating the voice activation system

Briefly press the button on the steer ing wheel or Cancel.

Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on which menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis play. Short commands exist for many functions. Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can also be selected via the voice activation sys tem. Speak these list entries exactly as they are displayed in the respective list.

Having possible commands read aloud You can have the available commands read out loud for you: Voice commands For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis played, the commands for the settings are read out loud.

Seite 23

Voice activation system At a glance

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, nearly irrespective of which menu item is currently selected, e.g., Vehicle status. List of short commands of the voice activation system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com munication Owner's Manual.

Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog: Help Additional commands for the help dialog: Help with examples: information about the

current operating options and the most im portant commands for them are an nounced.

Help with voice activation: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.

Example: playing back a CD Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Multimedia The medium last played is played back.

4. C D 5. C D drive 6. Track ..., e.g., CD track 4.

Via short command Playback of the CD can also be started via a short command.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. C D drive track ..., e.g., CD track 4.

Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the announcements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form. On the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select the setting.

Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button while giving an in struction until the desired volume is set. The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed. The volume is stored for the remote con

trol currently in use.

Seite 24

At a glance Voice activation system

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establish ment of a telephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 225, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.

Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun roof closed to prevent noise interference.

Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Seite 25

Voice activation system At a glance

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis played on the Control Display. The equipment and functions that are in the vehicle are descri bed therein.

Components of the integrated Owner's Manual The integrated Owner's Manual consists of three parts, which offer various levels of infor mation or access possibilities.

Quick Reference Guide Located in the Quick Reference is important information for the operation of the vehicle, the operation of basic vehicle functions or for what to do in the event of a flat tire. This information can also be displayed during driving.

Search by pictures Information and descriptions based on illustra tions can be searched via search by pictures. This is helpful, for example, if the description of an outfitting package that cannot be named is needed.

Owner's Manual Information and descriptions can be searched by direct entry of a search term via the index.

Select components

1. Press the button. 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info". 3. Press the controller. 4. Selecting desired range:

"Quick reference" "Search by pictures" "Owner's Manual"

Leafing through the Owner's Manual

Page by page with link access Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed.

Page by page without link access Leaf through the pages directly while skipping the links. Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to leaf from page to page.

Leaf back.

Leaf forward.

Seite 26

At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Context help - Owner's Manual to the temporarily selected function The relevant information can be opened di rectly.

Opening via the iDrive To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the options menu:

1. Press the button or move the control ler to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: "Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to switch between the two displays:

1. Press the button or move the control ler to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's

Manual.

4. Press the button again to return to the function displayed last.

5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To switch back and forth repeatedly between the function displayed last and the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4 and 5. This opens a new panel every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General information The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly.

Storing 1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.

Executing Press the button. The Owner's Manual is displayed im

mediately.

Seite 27

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with

information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort

and convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Opening and closing Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Remote control/key Buttons on the remote control

1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Opening the trunk lid 4 Panic mode, headlamp courtesy delay fea

ture

General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote con trols with keys. Every remote control contains a replaceable battery. The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car. Personal Pro file, refer to page 31.

Information on the required maintenance is stored in the remote control as well. Service data in the remote control, refer to page 216

Integrated key

Press the button on the back of the remote control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2. The integrated key fits the following locks: Driver's door. Trunk lid. Storage compartment in the front center

armrest.

The storage compartment contains a switch for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to page 39.

Replacing the battery

1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control.

2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.

Seite 30

Controls Opening and closing

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

3. Remove the cover of the battery compart ment; see arrow 2.

4. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards.

5. Press the cover closed. Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center.

New remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your service center.

Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center.

Emergency detection of remote control It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following: Interference of radio transmission to re

mote control by external sources. Discharged battery in the remote control. Interference of radio transmission by mo

bile devices in close proximity to the re mote control.

Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo bile devices in the vehicle.

A Check Control message is displayed if an at tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.

Starting the engine with emergency detection of the remote control

If a corresponding Check Control message ap pears, hold the remote control vertically against the marked area on the steering col umn and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake.

Personal Profile The concept You can set several of your vehicle's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. The settings are automatically saved in the

profile currently activated. The remote control used is detected when

the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro file is called up.

Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control.

The individual settings are stored for three Personal Profiles and one guest profile.

Transmitting the settings Your personal settings can be taken with you to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Profile function. For more information, contact your service center. Transmission takes place via: The USB interface in the center armrest

onto a USB device.

Seite 31

Opening and closing Controls

31 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

BMW Online.

Profile management

Opening the profiles A different profile can be called up than the one associated with the remote control cur rently in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. Select a profile. Called up profile is assigned to the remote control being used at the time.

Renaming profiles 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles"

The current profile is selected. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Rename current profile"

Resetting profiles The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles"

The current profile is selected. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Reset current profile"

Importing profiles Existing settings and contacts are overwritten with the imported profile.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Import profile" 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"

USB interface, refer to page 172: "USB device"

Exporting profiles Most settings of the active profile and the saved contacts can be exported. This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings, before delivering the vehicle to a workshop for example.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Export profile" 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"

USB interface, refer to page 172: "USB device"

Using the guest profile The guest profile can be used to make individ ual settings without affecting the three Per sonal Profiles. This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles"

The current profile is selected. 3. Open "Guest". 4. Create the settings. Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.

Display profile list during start The profile list can be displayed during each start for selecting the desired profile.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display user list at startup"

Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile. Collision warning: warning time.

Seite 32

Controls Opening and closing

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Exterior mirror position. CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to

last. Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings. Driving Dynamics Control: sport program. Driver's seat position: automatic retrieval

after unlocking. Programmable memory buttons: assign

ment. Head-up Display: selection, brightness,

position and rotation of the display. Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set

ting. Tone: tone settings. Automatic climate control: settings. Steering wheel position. Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice

output on/off. Night Vision with pedestrian detection. Intelligent Safety: individual settings. Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the

signal tone volume. Radio: stored stations, station listened to

last, special settings. Rearview camera: selection of functions

and type of display. Side View: selection of the display type. Language on the Control Display. Lane departure warning: last setting, on/

off. Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting,

on/off. Daytime running lights: current setting. Triple turn signal activation. Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or

after starting to drive.

Central locking system The concept The central locking system becomes active when the driver's door is closed. The system simultaneously engages and re leases the locks on the following: Doors. Trunk lid. Fuel filler flap.

Operating from the outside Via the remote control. Via the driver's door lock. Via the door handles. Via the button in the trunk lid. The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re mote control: Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,

the theft protection is activated/deacti vated. Theft protection prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock but tons or the door opener.

The welcome lamps, interior lamps and courtesy lamps are switched on and off.

The alarm system, refer to page 42, is armed or disarmed.

Operating from the inside

Via the button for the central locking system.

Seite 33

Opening and closing Controls

33 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the central locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: from the outside Using the remote control

General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.

Unlocking Press the button on the remote con trol.

The vehicle is unlocked. Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy lamps are switched on.

You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. Create the settings, refer to page 41.

Convenient opening The remote control can be used to simultane ously open the windows and the glass sunroof.

Press and hold the button on the re mote control.

The windows and the glass sunroof open. Releasing the button stops the motion.

Locking Press the button on the remote control.

Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside

if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

Switching on interior lamps and courtesy lamps

Press the button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote con trol for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Switching on the headlamp courtesy delay feature

Briefly press the button on the remote control.

The duration can be set in the Control Display.

Opening the trunk lid Press the button on the remote con trol for approx. 1 second.

The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote con trol if the vehicle has been unlocked.

Seite 34

Controls Opening and closing

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.

The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed.

Malfunction If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un locked with the remote control, the battery may be discharged or there may be interfer ence from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door at the door lock using the integrated key.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov erned by the following: FCC ID: LX8766S. LX8766E. LX8CAS. LX8CAS2. MYTCAS4. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful inter

ference, and this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Using the door lock

General information

Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside

if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

Remove the key before pulling the door handle

Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.

In some country-specific versions, the alarm system is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control. In some vehicle equipment versions, only the driver's door can be unlocked or locked via the door lock.

Locking the doors and trunk lid at once To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:

1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us ing the button for the central locking sys tem in the interior.

2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas senger door.

3. Lock the vehicle.

Seite 35

Opening and closing Controls

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Lock the driver's door using the integrated key in the door lock, or

Press down the lock button of the front passenger door and close the door from the outside.

The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the remote control.

Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or un lock the vehicle using the integrated key via the door lock on the driver's door.

Opening and closing: from the inside Locking and unlocking

Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the doors and the trunk lid when the front doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Unlocking and opening Either unlock the doors together using the

button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the arm rest or

Pull the door opener twice individually on each door: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Doors Automatic Soft Closing To close the doors, push lightly. It is closed automatically.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Trunk lid Opening During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening.

Opening from the outside

Press the button on the trunk lid.

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens with no-touch activation, refer to page 40.

Opening from the inside Push the button in the driver's foot well.

If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if it is not locked.

Seite 36

Controls Opening and closing

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Manual release All of the vehicle's keys fit the trunk lid lock, lo cated in the license plate recess.

Turn the key all the way to the left. The trunk lid unlocks. To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do not place the key or remote control in the cargo area. The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed.

If the trunk lid is opened via the lock with the alarm system armed, the alarm is triggered. Therefore, unlock the vehicle first. If the alarm has been triggered accidentally: switch off the alarm, refer to page 42.

Closing

Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down the lid.

Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path of the

trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re sult.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.

Automatic Soft Closing To close it completely, push the trunk lid down lightly. It is closed automatically.

Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path is clear;

otherwise, injuries may result.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid. When the driver's door is closed, the vehicle is completely locked.

Automatic tailgate operation

Opening The trunk lid opens fully.

Seite 37

Opening and closing Controls

37 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Press the button on the exterior of the trunk lid.

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

Push the button in the driver's footwell.

Pressing the button again stops the motion. The opening procedure is likewise interrupted: When starting the engine. When the vehicle starts moving. By pressing the button in the driver's foot

well. By pressing the button on the inside of the

trunk lid.

Closing Without Comfort Access:

Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid. The trunk lid closes automatically. Pressing the button again stops the mo tion.

With Comfort Access:

Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of the trunk lid. The trunk lid closes automatically. Pressing the button again stops the mo tion.

Press the button, arrow 2. The trunk lid closes automatically and the vehicle is locked.

Press the button on the exterior of the trunk lid. Pressing the button again stops the mo tion.

The closing operation is interrupted: When starting the engine. The vehicle starts off with jerks.

Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path of the

trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re sult.

Seite 38

Controls Opening and closing

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.

Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs:

1. Manually unlock the trunk lid, refer to page 37.

2. Open or close the trunk lid slowly and smoothly.

Locking separately The trunk lid can be locked separately with the switch in the front passenger glove compart ment.

Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. Trunk lid not secured, ar

row 2.

Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the central locking system. If the center arm rest is locked, the trunk lid cannot be opened. This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked using valet service. The infrared remote con trol can be handed out without the key.

Emergency unlocking

Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The trunk lid unlocks.

Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat ing the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote con trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment. Comfort Access supports the following func tions: Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. Convenient closing. Unlocking of the trunk lid separately. Open/close trunk lid with no-touch activa

tion. Start the engine.

Functional requirements There are no external sources of interfer

ence nearby. To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehicle. The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

Seite 39

Opening and closing Controls

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

The engine can only be started if the re mote control is inside the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons of the remote control or Comfort Access.

Unlocking

Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the button on the remote control.

Locking

Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the button on the remote control. To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con sumers are switched off before locking the ve hicle.

Convenient closing Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with the finger and hold it down. In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof are closed.

Monitor the closing process Monitor the closing process to ensure

that no one becomes trapped.

Unlocking the trunk lid separately Press the button on the exterior of the trunk lid, refer to page 36. This corresponds to pressing the but ton on the remote control.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.

Opening/closing trunk lid with no- touch activation With Comfort Access, the trunk lid can be opened or closed with no-touch activation us ing the remote control you are carrying. A sensor detects a directed foot motion in the center of the area at the rear of the car and the trunk lid opens.

Foot movement to be carried out Do not touch vehicle With the foot motion, make sure there is

steady stance and do not touch the vehicle; otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from hot exhaust system parts.

1. Position in the center behind the vehicle.

Seite 40

Controls Opening and closing

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

2. Move foot in the direction of travel under neath the bumper and immediately back.

Opening The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. Before the opening, the hazard warning sys tem flashes.

Preventing inadvertent opening In situations where the trunk lid should is

not to be opened with no-touch activation, en sure that the remote control is located beyond the range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m from the rear of the car. Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad vertently, for example by an unintentional or misinterpreted movement of the foot.

Closing The hazard warning system flashes on and an acoustic signal sounds before the trunk lid closes. During closing, the trunk lid pivots back and down. The closing of the trunk lid has no effect on the locking of the vehicle. Another foot movement can interrupt the clos ing operation.

Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path of the

trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re sult.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.

Malfunction Comfort Access may not function properly if it experiences interference from external sour ces such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. In this case, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use the integrated key in the door lock. If there is a malfunction, open the trunk lid with the remote control button or with the button on the trunk lid.

Adjusting Unlocking The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 3. Select symbol or "Unlock button:" 4. Select the desired function:

"Driver's door only" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un locks the entire vehicle.

"All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Seite 41

Opening and closing Controls

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or the country-specific variant, you can set whether the doors are also unlocked with the

button on the remote control.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir

mation signals. "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" "Flash when lock/unlock"

Automatic locking The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 3. Select the desired function:

"Lock if no door opened" The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened.

"Lock after start driving" The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away.

Retrieving the seat, mirror, and steering wheel settings The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions selected last are stored for the currently used remote control. When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions are automatically retrieved if this function was activated.

Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure

that the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or ob jects damaged when the seat is moved back.

The adjustment procedure is interrupted:

When a seat position switch is pressed. When a button of the seat, mirror, and

steering wheel memory is pressed briefly.

Activating the setting 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 3. "Last seat position autom."

Alarm system The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to: Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk

lid. Movements in the vehicle. Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at

tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the car.

Interruptions in battery voltage. The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: By sounding an acoustic alarm. By switching on the hazard warning sys

tem. By flashing the high beams.

Arming and disarming the alarm system

General information When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control, Comfort Access or at the door lock the alarm system is armed or dis armed at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm system Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm on some country-specific versions. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni

Seite 42

Controls Opening and closing

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control.

Trunk lid and armed alarm system The trunk lid can be opened even when the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote con trol for approx. 1 second.

With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens with no-touch activation, refer to page 40. After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and monitored again if the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once. In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote con trol if the vehicle was unlocked first.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote con trol for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Switching off the alarm Unlock the vehicle using the remote con

trol. With Comfort Access: If you are carrying

the remote control with you, pull on the driver side or front passenger side door handle.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror

The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The system is armed.

The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se cured. After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. Interior motion sen sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.

The indicator lamp goes out after unlock ing: The vehicle has not been tampered with.

The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed.

Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Seite 43

Opening and closing Controls

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations: In automatic car washes. In duplex garages. During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer. When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle

is locked. The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec onds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Power windows General information

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the power windows and in jure themselves.

Opening

Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held.

Press the switch beyond the resist ance point. The window opens automatically.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Convenient opening, refer to page 34, via the remote control.

Closing Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held.

Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically.

Pressing the switch stops the motion. Convenient closing, refer to page 40, with Comfort Access.

Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is inter rupted. The window reopens slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other

Seite 44

Controls Opening and closing

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.

No window accessories Do not install any accessories in the

range of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.

Closing without the pinch protection system

Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

For example, if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. The pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protec tion.

Safety switch The following functions can be locked simulta neously, using the switch: Opening and closing of the rear windows

using the switches in the rear. Operation of the roller sunblinds using the

switches in the rear. Adjustment of the power rear seats. Adjustment of the power head restraints in

the rear.

Switching on and off Press the button.

The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on.

Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transport

ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result if the windows are closed without super vision.

Roller sunblinds General information The safety switch in the driver's door can be used to prevent children, for example, from op erating the roller blinds using the switches in the rear. Press the safety switch in the driver's door. The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on. If you are no longer able to move the roller blinds after having activated them consecu tively a number of times, the system is blocked for a limited time to prevent overheating. Let the system cool. The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low interior temperatures.

Driver's door controls

Roller blind for rear window Press the button.

Seite 45

Opening and closing Controls

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Raising and lowering the roller blinds together

Press and hold the button.

Rear door controls

Roller blind for the side windows Press the button.

The roller blind can only be extended or re tracted when the side window is closed.

Roller blind for rear window Press the button.

Raising and lowering the roller blinds together

Press and hold the button.

Glass sunroof, powered General information The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be operated together or separately, using the same switch. The glass sunroof is operational when the igni tion is switched on.

Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them selves.

Tilting the glass sunroof Push switch upward briefly. The closed roof is tilted and

the sliding visor opens slightly.

The opened roof closes until it is in its tilted position. The sliding visor stays com pletely open.

Opening/closing the sliding visor Press the switch in the de

sired direction to the resist ance point and hold it there. The sliding visor moves while the switch is being held.

Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point. The sliding visor moves automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the mo tion.

Seite 46

Controls Opening and closing

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Opening/closing the glass sunroof When the sliding visor is open, proceed as de scribed under Sliding visor.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together

Briefly press the switch twice in succession in the desired direc tion past the resistance point. The glass sunroof and sliding vi sor move together. Pressing the

switch again stops the motion.

Convenient operation, refer to page 34, via the remote control. Convenient closing, refer to page 40, with Comfort Access.

Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or from the tilted position during closing. The glass sunroof opens again slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.

Closing from the open position without pinch protection For example, if there is an external danger, pro ceed as follows:

1. Press the switch forward beyond the re sistance point and hold. Pinch protection is limited and the roof re opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the roof closes without pinch protection.

Closing from the raised position without pinch protection If there is an external danger, push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it. The roof closes without pinch protection.

Initializing after a power failure After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the roof can only be operated to a limited extent.

Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. During the initialization, the roof closes without pinch protection.

Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Press the switch up and hold it until the initialization is com plete: Initialization begins within

15 seconds and is com pleted when the sunroof and sliding visor are completely closed.

The roof closes without pinch protection.

Seite 47

Opening and closing Controls

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Adjusting Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: Safety belts, refer to page 54. Head restraints, refer to page 55. Airbags, refer to page 100.

Front seats General information

Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv

ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear

Also on the front passenger side, do not incline the backrest on the front passenger side too far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt.

Electrically adjustable seats

At a glance

1 Thigh support 2 Forward/back, height, tilt 3 Shoulder support 4 Backrest width 5 Lumbar support 6 Backrest

Note The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the remote control currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the Function, refer to page 42, for this is activated.

Adjustments in detail 1. Forward/back.

Seite 48

Controls Adjusting

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

2. Height.

3. Seat tilt.

4. Backrest tilt.

5. Thigh support.

Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Press the front/rear section of the switch. The curvature is increased/ decreased.

Press the upper/lower sec tion of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/ down.

Backrest width Change the width of the back rest using the side wings to ad just the lateral support.

To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, the backrest width temporarily opens fully.

Shoulder support

Also supports the back in the shoulder area: Results in a relaxed seating position. Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.

Gentleman function The front passenger seat can be adjusted with the switches of the driver's seat.

Seite 49

Adjusting Controls

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

1. Press the button. The LED lights up.

2. Adjust the front passenger seat on your own seat.

3. If needed, store the memory position, refer to page 57, for the front passenger seat.

4. Press the button to deactivate the function. The LED goes out.

The function deactivates itself automatically after some time.

Active seat Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain.

Press the button. The LED lights up.

Front seat heating

Switching on Press the button once for each tem perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi nutes, the seat heating is activated automati cally with the temperature selected last. When ECO PRO, refer to page 189, is acti vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out.

Temperature distribution The heating action in the seat cushion and backrest can be distributed in different ways.

1. "Climate" 2. "Front seat heating" 3. Select the required seat. 4. Turn the controller to set the temperature

distribution.

Active seat ventilation, front The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are cooled by means of integrated fans. The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehi cle interior is overheated or for continuous cooling at high temperatures.

Seite 50

Controls Adjusting

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Switching on Press the button once for each venti lation level.

The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit.

After a short time, the system automatically moves down one level in order to prevent ex cessive cooling.

Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out.

Rear seats General information The switches for adjusting the seats are lo cated on the center armrest of the rear seats.

Center armrest When folding down the center armrest,

ensure that the area below the center head re straint is clear. Otherwise, injury may result.

Electrically adjustable seats

At a glance

1 Forward/backward, tilt 2 Backrest 3 Adjust front passenger seat 4 Reset to standard position 5 Head restraint. 6 Lumbar support

The seats cannot be adjusted if the safety switch for the power windows has been pressed.

Adjustments in detail 1. Forward/back.

Seite 51

Adjusting Controls

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

2. Seat tilt.

3. Backrest tilt.

Lumbar support The contour of the seat backrest can be ad justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Press the front/rear section of the switch. The curvature is increased/decreased.

Press the upper/lower section of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/down.

Adjusting the front passenger seat from the rear For more leg room in the rear, for example.

1. Press the button to activate the function, arrow.

2. Adjust the passenger seat, e.g., forward/ back.

3. Press the button to deactivate the function, arrow.

The function deactivates itself automatically after some time.

Reset to standard position

Maintain pressure on the button until the sys tem completes the adjustment.

Massage function in rear seats Wavelike motions from the top to the bottom in the backrest relax back muscles.

Seite 52

Controls Adjusting

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Button in rear

Switching on To switch on, press the button once for each massage level.

The highest level is active when two LEDs are lit.

Switching off To switch off, press and hold the button. The LEDs go out.

Rear seat heating

Switching on Press the button once for each tem perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi nutes, the seat heating is activated automati cally with the temperature selected last. When ECO PRO, refer to page 189, is acti vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out.

Temperature distribution The heating action in the seat cushion and backrest can be distributed in different ways.

1. "Climate" 2. "Seat heating rear" 3. Select the required seat. 4. Turn the controller to set the temperature

distribution.

Active seat ventilation

Switching on Press the button once for each venti lation level.

The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit. If when the seat ventilation is turned on the Maximum Cooling function is activated, the seat ventilation automatically switches to the highest level. When the Maximum Cooling function is switched off, the unit switches to the previously set level.

Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out.

Seite 53

Adjusting Controls

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Safety belts Seats with safety belt The vehicle has five seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.

Hints Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts. The shoulder strap's anchorage point will

be correct for adult seat occupants of ev ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated into the rear seat, are for pas sengers sitting on the left and right.

The center rear seat belt buckle is solely intended for the center passenger.

One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.

Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breakable objects, or be pinched.

Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the

belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced.

Buckling the belt

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Tensioning the safety belt automatically After the belt is buckled and the door is closed, the belt is tightened once automatically.

Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Safety belt reminder for driver's and passenger's seat

The indicator lamp flashes or lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned cor

rectly. The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Safety mode In critical situations, e.g., during full brake ap plication, the front safety belts tighten auto matically. If the situation passes without an accident oc curring, the belt tension relaxes. If the belt tension does not loosen automati cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt

Seite 54

Controls Adjusting

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the belt before continuing on your trip.

Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.

Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.

Front head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in creased risk of injury in an accident.

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Active head restraint In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer tain severity, the active head restraint automat ically reduces the distance from the head.

Reduced protective function Do not use seat or head restraint

covers.

Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers, on the head restraints.

Only attach accessories approved by BMW to the seat or head restraint.

Otherwise, the protective function of the active head restraint will be impaired and the per sonal safety of the occupants will be endan gered.

In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Have the active headrest checked and if nec essary replaced.

Adjusting the height

Adjusting electrically.

Distance to back of head: electrical head restraints The head restraint is automatically reposi tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted.

Adjusting the side extensions

Fold forward for increased lateral support in the resting position.

Seite 55

Adjusting Controls

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Removing The head restraints cannot be removed.

Rear head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in creased risk of injury in an accident.

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Folding forward the center head restraint

Before using the center seat, fold the center head restraint forward. Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the head restraint forward.

Adjusting the height: manual head restraints

The height of the outer head restraints can be adjusted. To raise: pull. To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the height: electrical The head restraints on the left and right

rear passenger seats extend automatically whenever a passenger in the rear seat fas tens his or her safety belt.

In addition, the height of the head restraint can be adjusted electrically.

Extending the head restraint To prevent possible personal injury and

property damage, always ensure that the area above the head restraints is clear and unob structed before extending them upward.

The height adjustment of the head restraint is deactivated when the safety switch for the rear windows, refer to page 45, has been pressed.

Seite 56

Controls Adjusting

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Adjusting the side extensions

Fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the resting position.

Removing: manual head restraints Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as possible.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro tective function of the head restraint is unavail able.

Removing: electrical head restraints

Note Do not remove the rear head restraints. To avoid damage, they may only be installed by your service center.

Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. Completely raise the head restraint. 2. Completely pull out the head restraint with

a firm tug. Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro tective function of the head restraint is unavail able.

Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory General information

Front

Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions can be stored and re trieved for each remote control. The adjust ment of the lumbar support is not stored.

Rear

Seite 57

Adjusting Controls

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Two different seat positions can be stored and retrieved.

Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED goes out.

If the M button is pressed accidentally: Press the button again. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while

driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel could result in an acci dent.

Comfort function 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Switch off the ignition. 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. The corresponding seat position is performed automatically. The procedure stops when a switch for adjust ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

Safety mode 1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig

nition. 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2

until the adjustment procedure is com pleted.

Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: Open or close the door or trunk lid. Press a button on the remote control. Press the Start/Stop button.

Mirrors Exterior mirrors

At a glance

1 Adjusting 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Fold in and out

General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the mirror setting is stored for the remote control in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re

Seite 58

Controls Adjusting

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

mote control, the position is automatically re trieved if the setting for this function is active.

Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the mirror changeover switch.

Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direc tion in which the button is pressed.

Saving positions Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 57.

Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic Curb Monitor When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas senger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when park ing, for example.

Activating

1. Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver's side mirror position.

2. Engage transmission position R.

Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas senger's side mirror position.

Fold in and out Press the button.

Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. For example, this is advantageous

In car washes. In narrow streets. For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before washing the car in an automatic

car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.

Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming feature Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim med. Photocells are used for control in the In terior rear view mirror, refer to page 60.

Interior rearview mirror

Reducing the blinding effect

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Seite 59

Adjusting Controls

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature

The concept

Photocells are used for control: In the mirror glass. On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirement For proper operation: Keep the photocells clean. Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

Illuminated vanity mirror in the rear Folding down

Press the button. The vanity mirror folds down. The angle can be adjusted by hand.

Folding up Press the mirror up.

Steering wheel General information

Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.

Adjusting

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di rections.

Storing the position Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 57.

Assistance getting in and out The steering wheel temporarily moves into the highest position to make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle.

Seite 60

Controls Adjusting

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.

Seite 61

Adjusting Controls

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Transporting children safely Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

The right place for children Note

Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.

Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat.

Transporting children in the rear Only transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint fixing systems pro vided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an in creased risk of injury in an accident. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.

Children on the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re straint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deacti

vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen ger side airbags, refer to page 102.

Note Deactivated front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re straint fixing system.

Installing child restraint fixing systems Before mounting If the rear seat backrests are adjustable or can be folded down:

Lock the rear seat backrests in position Before mounting child restraint fixing

systems, place the seat backrest as far as pos sible at an angle at which the child seat is rest ing firmly against the backrest and all back rests can be locked securely in place. Otherwise, the child seat will not be as stable as it should be, and there is increased danger of injury due to unexpected movement of the seat backrest.

Hints Manufacturer's information for child re straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro tective effect can be impaired.

Seite 62

Controls Transporting children safely

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Lock the rear seat backrests in position Before installing a child restraint system,

make sure that the rear seat backrests are locked; otherwise, the protective effect is not guaranteed and there is an increased risk of in jury for the child in the event of an accident.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags After installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front pas senger side are deactivated. Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto matically, refer to page 102.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re straint fixing system.

Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and bring it up to medium height to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. Do not change the seat position and height af ter this.

Backrest width Adjustable backrest width: before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front pas senger seat, open the backrest width com pletely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position.

Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing

system in the front passenger seat, the back rest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stability of the child seat will be reduced.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be locked against pulling out for mounting the child restraint fixing systems.

Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely. 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system

with the belt. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com

pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil dren.

Seite 63

Transporting children safely Controls

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Note Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fixing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufac turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be reduced.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restr- ained by the internal harnesses.

Correctly engage the lower LATCH an chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fixing system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.

Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix ing system, pull the belt away from the child restraint fixing system.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo cated in the gap between the seat and back rest.

Without power rear seats: Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing systems 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re

fer to the user's manual of the system.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop erly connected.

With power rear seats: Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing systems 1. Before mounting, adjust the seats to their

basic position, refer to page 52. 2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest

back slightly. 3. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re

fer to the user's manual of the system. 4. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop

erly connected. 5. After mounting, move the backrest back up

slightly so that the child restraint fixing sys tem rests lightly against the backrest.

Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap

Mounting points

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are two outer or three mounting points for child re straint fixing systems with a tether strap.

Note Mounting eyes Only use the mounting eyes for the up

per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix ing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.

Seite 64

Controls Transporting children safely

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure that the upper retaining strap

is not routed over the head restraints or sharp edges and is free of twisting on its way to the upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in an accident.

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint. 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point/eye 5 Rear window shelf 6 Seat backrest 7 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Remove the mounting point cover. 2. Raise the head restraint.

Do not change the middle head restraint. 3. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint. Guide it over the head restraint of the mid dle seat.

4. Attach the hooks of the retaining strap to the mounting eyes.

5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.

Locking the doors and windows Rear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down. The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the

rear.

This locks various functions so that they can not be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 45.

Seite 65

Transporting children safely Controls

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Driving Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Start/Stop button The concept

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed when you press

the Start/Stop button.

Ignition on Press the Start/Stop button and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of time. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. The ignition switches off automatically: When locking the vehicle, even if the low

beams are switched on. Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still be started.

Note If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.

Ignition off Press the Start/Stop button again and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Transmission position P with the ignition off

When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an automatic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.

The ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped: When locking the vehicle, and when the

low beams are activated. Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched off.

When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off.

While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if the driver's door is open and the low beams are switched off.

When the ignition is switched off, by opening or closing the driver's door or unbuckling the driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remains active.

Seite 66

Controls Driving

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Radio ready state Activate radio ready state: When the engine is running: press the

Start/Stop button. Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation. The radio ready state switches off automati cally: After approx. 8 minutes. When the vehicle is locked using the cen

tral locking system. Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still be started.

Starting the engine Hints

Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed

areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.

Unattended vehicle Do not leave the vehicle unattended with

the engine running; doing so poses a risk of danger. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning, set the parking brake and place the trans mission in position P or neutral to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Repeated starting in quick succession Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to

start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing a risk of overheating and damage to the cata lytic converter.

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds.

Starting the engine Press on the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button. The engine is cranked until it starts.

Engine stop Hints

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot start the engine.

Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve hicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.

Before driving into a car wash In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car wash, heed the information regarding Washing in automatic car washes, refer to page 230.

Switching off the engine 1. Engage transmission position P with the

vehicle stopped. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off. The radio ready state is switched on.

3. Set the parking brake.

Seite 67

Driving Controls

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function The concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in a traffic congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts again automatically for driving off. Certain vehicle components may experience additional wear as a result of this system.

Automatic mode The Auto Start/Stop function is operational af ter each engine start. This function is activated at speeds faster than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.

Engine stop The engine is switched off automatically dur ing a stop under the following conditions: Automatic transmission: The selector lever is in transmission posi

tion D. The brake pedal remains pressed while the

vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by Automatic Hold.

The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv er's door is closed.

The air volume of the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster The display indicates that the automatic engine start-stop function is ready for an auto matic engine start.

The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic en gine stop have not been satis fied.

Note The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations: External temperature too low. The external temperature is high and auto

matic climate control is running. The passenger compartment has not yet

been heated or cooled to the required level.

The engine is not yet at operating temper ature.

The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned.

After driving in reverse. Fogging of the windows when the auto

matic climate control is switched on. Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. The engine compartment lid is unlocked. HDC Hill Descent Control is activated. The parking assistant is activated. Stop-and-go traffic. The transmission selector lever is in posi

tion N or M/S. Use of fuel with high ethanol content.

Starting the engine The engine starts automatically under the fol lowing conditions: Automatic transmission:

By releasing the brake pedal. When Automatic Hold is activated: press the accelerator.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Seite 68

Controls Driving

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met. The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and

the driver's door is open. The hood was unlocked. Some indicator lamps light up for varying lengths of time. The engine can only be started via the Start/ Stop button.

Note Even if driving away was not intended, the de activated engine starts up automatically in the following situations: Excessive warming of the passenger com

partment when the cooling function is switched on.

The steering wheel is turned. Automatic transmission: the transmission

position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S. Automatic transmission: the transmission

position is changed from P to N, D, R or M/S.

Fogging of the windows when the auto matic climate control is switched on.

Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. Excessive cooling of the passenger com

partment when the heating is switched on.

Activating/deactivating the system manually

Using the button

Press the button.

LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is deactivated. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.

LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e.g., when leaving it.

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. Transmission position P is engaged auto matically.

2. Set the parking brake. Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea sons, such as when the driver is detected to be absent.

Seite 69

Driving Controls

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches of the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked.

Parking brake The concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi cle from rolling when it is parked.

Setting Pull the switch. The LED lights up.

The indicator lamp lights up red. The parking brake is set. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve hicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.

While driving Use while driving serves as an emergency braking function:

Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled.

The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig nal sounds and the brake lamps light up. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models.

If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.

Releasing Press the switch while the brake is de pressed or transmission position P is en

gaged. The LED and indicator lamp go out.

The parking brake is released. Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot release the parking brake.

Automatic release For automatic release, operate the accelerator pedal. The LED and indicator lamp go out. Subject to the following requirements, the parking brake is automatically released by op eration of the accelerator pedal: Engine on. Drive position engaged. Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Inadvertent operation of the accelerator pedal

Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is set in motion and there is a risk of an acci dent.

Seite 70

Controls Driving

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Manual release The parking brake can be released manually in the event of a power failure or electrical fault.

Before releasing, secure the vehicle against rolling

Before releasing the parking brake manually, and whenever you park the vehicle with the parking brake released, ensure that position P of the automatic transmission is engaged. Secure the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the inclination of the road, e.g., with a wheel chock; otherwise, there is the danger of the ve hicle rolling.

Unlocking 1. Remove the release tool from the onboard

vehicle tool kit.

2. Raise the cargo floor panel in the cargo area.

3. Take out the floor trim in the cargo area, removing the screws with the release tool, arrows.

4. Place the release tool on the release point, arrow.

5. Forcefully pull the release tool up against the resistance until you notice a marked in crease in the resistance and the parking brake releases audibly.

Have the malfunction corrected If the parking brake has been released

manually in response to a malfunction, only technicians can return it to operation. Have the malfunction corrected by your serv ice center.

Seite 71

Driving Controls

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

After a power failure Only put the parking brake into operation after a power failure

The parking brake should only be put into op eration again if it was manually released due to an interruption in the supply of electrical power. Otherwise, it cannot be ensured that the parking brake will function properly.

Putting the parking brake into operation 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the switch while the brake is depressed or transmission position P is engaged.

It may take several seconds for the brake to be put into operation. Any sounds associated with this are normal.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models.

Automatic Hold

The concept This system assists the driver by automatically setting and releasing the brake, such as when moving in stop-and-go traffic. The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary. On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when driving away.

For your safety Under the following conditions, Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated and the park ing brake is set: The engine is switched off. A door is opened and driver's safety belt is

unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary. The moving vehicle is brought to a stand

still using the parking brake. The indicator lamp switches from green to red and the letters AUTO H go out. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models.

Leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning, engage position P of the automatic trans mission and ensure that the parking brake is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Activating This function can be activated when the driv er's door is closed and the safety belt is fas tened, and while driving.

Press the button. The LED and the letters AUTO H light

up.

The indicator lamp lights up. Automatic Hold is activated.

Seite 72

Controls Driving

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Deactivating Press the button again. The LED and the letters AUTO H go

out.

Automatic Hold is deactivated. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, press on the brake pedal to deactivate it. When the parking brake is set manually, Auto matic Hold is deactivated automatically.

Driving Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au tomatically secured against rolling after brak ing to a standstill.

The indicator lamp lights up green. Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off. The brake is released automatically. The indicator lamp goes out.

Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian mod els

Before driving into a car wash Before driving into the car wash, deacti

vate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the parking brake will be set when the vehicle is stationary and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll.

Parking The parking brake is automatically set if the engine is switched off while the vehicle is be ing held by Automatic Hold.

The indicator lamp changes from green to red. The parking brake is not set if the en gine is switched off while the vehicle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is

deactivated. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian mod els

Automatic Hold remains activated during the engine stop brought about by the Auto Start/ Stop function.

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot release the parking brake.

Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll ing using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving it.

Turn signal, high beams, headlamp flasher Turn signal

Do not fold in the exterior mirrors Do not fold in the exterior mirror while

driving and when the turn signals/warning flashers are working, or else the additional flasher lights in the exterior mirror will no lon ger be in the prescribed position and will be difficult to see.

Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Seite 73

Driving Controls

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. The function can be activated or deactivated:

1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Triple turn signal"

Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

High beams, headlamp flasher

High beams, arrow 1. Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are

frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.

No wiper operation on dry windshield Do not use the windshield wipers if the

windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Switching on

Press the wiper levers up. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Normal wiping speed: press up once.

The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. The wipers switch to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the wiper levers down. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Brief wipe: press down once. To switch off normal wipe: press down

once. To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Seite 74

Controls Driving

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Rain sensor

The concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir ror.

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever. The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip ing operation is started. At temperatures below 32 /0 , a wiping operation is not started.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise, damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation.

Rain sensor, sensitivity

Turn the thumbwheel.

Clean the windshield, headlamps

Pull the wiper lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly.

In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu lar intervals when the vehicle lights are switched on.

Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.

Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are automati cally heated while the ignition is switched on.

Fold-out position of the wipers Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for example.

1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the

wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind shield.

3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position.

Seite 75

Driving Controls

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

Fold the wipers back down Before switching the ignition on, fold the

wipers back down to the windshield; other wise, the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on.

1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers

move to their resting position and are ready for operation.

Washer fluid General information

Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause

injury if it is used incorrectly. Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni tion. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the notes and instructions on the con tainer. United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con tainer. Use BMWs Windshield Washer Con centrate or the equivalent.

Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.

All washer nozzles are supplied from one res ervoir. Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con centrate and tap water and if required with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufac turer's recommendations. Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio. Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water; this could damage the wiper system. Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it can result in clogging of the windshield washer nozzles. For the capacity, refer to technical data.

Automatic transmission with Steptronic Transmission positions

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for ward gears are available.

R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral Use in automatic car washes, for example. The vehicle can roll.

Seite 76

Controls Driving

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

When the ignition is switched off, refer to page 66, position P is engaged automatically.

P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically: After the engine is switched off when the

vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to page 67, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 66, and when position R or D is engaged.

With the ignition is off, if position N is en gaged.

If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and transmission position R or D is engaged.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi tion P of the automatic transmission is en gaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Engaging the transmission position Transmission position P can only be disen

gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed.

With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock.

Depress the brake until you start driving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Engaging D, R and N

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position.

Press unlock button, in order to: Engage R. Shift out of P.

Engaging P

Press button P.

Seite 77

Driving Controls

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Sport program and manual mode

Activating the sport program

Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster, e.g., S1. The sport program of the transmission is acti vated.

Activating the M/S manual mode 1. Push the selector lever to the left out of

transmission position D. 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it

backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster, e.g., M1. Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.

Switching to manual mode To shift down: press the selector lever for

ward. To shift up: pull the selector lever rear

wards. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos sible if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Ending the sport program/manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode. If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle is not accelerated for a certain time, the sys tem switches back into automatic mode if the selector lever is in transmission position D. Shift up: pull right shift paddle. Shift down: pull left shift paddle. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos sible if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster The transmission position is dis played, e.g.: P.

Seite 78

Controls Driving

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Displays Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip

ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge85 2 Speedometer 3 Indicator/warning lamps83 4 Tachometer85

5 Oil temperature85 6 Electronic displays80 7 Reset miles86

Seite 79

Displays Controls

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Electronic displays

Overview, instrument cluster

1 Messages, e.g. Check Control83 Time86

2 Range86 3 Computer91 4 Navigation display, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communi cation. Service requirements87

Miles/trip miles86 5 Selection list, e.g., radio90

Current fuel consumption87 Energy recovery87 External temperature86 Transmission display78

Multifunctional instrument display The concept The instrument dispaly is a variable display. When the driving mode is changed, the ap

pearance is changed to reflect the new driving mode. The change of appearance can be de activated in the Control Display. Some of the displays in the instrument display may differ from the way they are shown in this owner's manual.

Seite 80

Controls Displays

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

At a glance

1 Fuel gauge85 2 Indicator/warning lamps83 3 Speedometer 4 Variable displays 5 Tachometer85

Selection lists90 ECO PRO displays189

6 Oil temperature85 7 Computer91 8 Reset miles86

Switching the change of display on and off You can set whether the instrument display automatically changes to the ECO PRO or SPORT in the display when you switch driving modes.

1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "ECO PRO Info"

or"Driving mode view"

With Professional Navigation System: switching zoom function on/off Switching You can program whether the current speed is to appear enlarged in the speedometer.

1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Magnifier function"

Seite 81

Displays Controls

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

ECO PRO displays

1 Speedometer 2 Variable displays: ECO PRO Tips, Deceler

ation assistant instructions, Driver assist system displays

3 Efficiency display189

4 Transmission display78 5 Blue: bonus range

Gray: range

In ECO PRO driving mode, the instrument dis play switches to the ECO PRO displays. These displays support a driving style that saves on

fuel consumption with more prominent repre sentation of the efficiency display and various ECO PRO tips.

Seite 82

Controls Displays

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Sport displays

1 Speedometer 2 Tachometer 3 Transmission display78

4 Shift lights, when appropriately equipped 5 Performance display 6 Variable displays

In the Sport and Sport+ modes, the instrument display switches to the sport displays. This display supports a sporty driving style with more prominent representation of the tachom eter, the transmission displays, and the vehicle speed.

Check Control The concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lamps The indicator and warning lamps in the instru ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi nations and colors. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Seite 83

Displays Controls

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Overview: indicator/warning lamps

Symbol Function or system

Turn signal.

Parking brake.

Parking brake in Canadian models.

Automatic hold.

Front fog lamps.

High beams.

High-beam Assistant.

Parking lamps, headlamp control.

Active Cruise Control.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control: collision warning.

Cruise control.

Lane departure warning.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Symbol Function or system

Tire Pressure Monitor. Flat Tire Monitor.

Safety belts.

Airbag system.

Steering system.

Engine functions.

Engine functions in Canadian mod els.

Brake system.

Brake system in Canadian models.

ABS Antilock Brake System.

ABS Antilock Brake System in Canadian models.

At least one Check Control mes sage is displayed or is stored.

Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con trol message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.

Seite 84

Controls Displays

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

The supplementary text of urgent messages is automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Symbols Depending on the Check Control message, the following functions can be selected. "Owner's Manual"

Display additional information about the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner's Manual.

"Service request" Contact the service partner.

"Roadside Assistance" Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the computer button on the turn signal lever.

Some Check Control messages are dis played continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes sages are displayed consecutively. These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis played again automatically.

Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control" 4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completion Special messages that are displayed during driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Fuel gauge The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary. US models: the arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler

flap is on. Hints on refueling, refer to page 196.

Tachometer Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter rupted to protect the engine.

Engine oil temperature Cold engine: the pointer is at

the low temperature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds.

Normal operating tempera ture: the pointer is in the middle or in the left half of the temperature display.

Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem perature end. A Check Control message is also displayed.

Seite 85

Displays Controls

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Coolant temperature If the coolant along with the engine becomes too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. Check the coolant level, refer to page 215.

Odometer and trip odometer Odometer, arrow 1. Trip odometer, arrow 2.

Display/reset miles Press the knob. When the ignition is

switched off, the time, the external temperature and the odometer are displayed.

When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

External temperature External temperature warning

If the indicator drops to +37 /+3 or lower, a signal sounds. A Check Control message is displayed.

There is the increased danger of ice.

Ice on roads Even at temperatures above

+37 /+3 , there can be a risk of ice on roads. Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, for example, to avoid the in creased risk of an accident.

Time The time is displayed at the bot tom of the instrument cluster. Setting the time and time for mat, refer to page 93.

Date The date is displayed in the computer. Setting the date and date for mat, refer to page 93.

Range After the reserve range is reached: A Check Control message is

displayed briefly. The remaining range is

shown on the computer. When a dynamic driving style is used, such

as when cornering quickly, operation of the engine is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears continu ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.

Displaying the cruising range 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators" The range is displayed in the instrument clus ter.

Seite 86

Controls Displays

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Range when destination guidance is activated in the navigation system

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation sys tem, the range up to the desti nation is displayed.

Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel con sumption. You can check whether you are currently driv ing in an efficient and environ mentally-friendly manner.

Displaying the current fuel consumption 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators" The bar display for the current fuel consump tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Energy recovery The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted to electrical energy while coasting. The vehicle bat tery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be lowered.

Service requirements Display

The driving distance or the time to the next scheduled mainte nance is displayed briefly after the ignition is switched on.

The current service requirements can be read out from the remote control by the service specialist. With TeleService, data regarding the service status or legally mandated inspections of your vehicle are automatically transmitted to your service center before the service due date.

Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re quired can be displayed on the Control Dis play.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and le gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa tion.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently re quired.

The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.

The service deadline has al ready passed.

Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections. Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required"

Seite 87

Displays Controls

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

4. " Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" 6. Adjust the settings. 7. Confirm.

The entered date is stored.

Automatic Service Request Data regarding the service status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto matically transmitted to your service center before a service due date. You can check when your service center was notified.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"

Service history Perform maintenance work at the service cen ter and have them recorded in the vehicle data. The entries are like a service booklet of the documentation of regular maintenance. The entered maintenance work can be dis played on the Control Display. Function is available as soon as a maintenance operation has been entered in the vehicle data.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" 4. "Service history"

Performed maintenance operations are displayed.

5. Select an entry to call up detailed informa tion.

Symbols

Symbols Description

Green: maintenance was per formed on schedule.

Yellow: maintenance was per formed late.

Maintenance was not per formed.

Gear shift indicator The concept The system recommends the most fuel effi cient gear in the current driving situation. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and the country-specific version of the vehicle, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the automatic transmission. Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster. On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the engaged gear is displayed.

Displays

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is engaged.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Seite 88

Controls Displays

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Speed limit detection with No Passing Information The concept

Speed limit detection Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit. The camera at the base of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also detected and compared with vehicle interior data, such as for the rain sensor, and are dis played depending on the situation. The system takes into account the information stored in the navigation system and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs.

No Passing Information No Passing Information in the instrument clus ter displays the beginnings and ends of no passing zones detected by the camera. The system accounts for only the beginnings and ends of No Passing zones marked by signs. No display is shown: In countries where No Passing zones are

primarily identified with road markings. On routes without signage. Where there are railroad crossings, high

way markings or other situations where no signage is present, but passing would not be permitted.

Hints Personal judgment The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system assists the driver and does not re place the human eye.

At a glance

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Speed limit information" If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be displayed on the info display in the instru ment cluster via the onboard computer. No Passing Information is displayed together with the activated speed limit information.

Display The following is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Speed limit detection Current speed limit.

Speed limit detection is not available.

Seite 89

Displays Controls

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

No Passing Information Start of No Passing zone. End of No Passing zone. No Passing Information not

available.

No Passing Information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol lowing situations: In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. When signs are concealed by objects. When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you. When driving toward bright lights. When the windshield behind the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered by a sticker, etc.

In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.

If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect.

In areas not covered by the navigation sys tem.

When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in the road net work.

When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.

If the traffic signs are non-conforming. During calibration of the camera immedi

ately after vehicle shipment.

Selection lists in the instrument cluster The concept

The following can be operated using the but tons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel: Current audio source. Redial on telephone. Activation of the voice activation system.

Activating a list and creating the setting

On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list. Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb wheel.

Seite 90

Controls Displays

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Computer Indication in the info display

The information from the on board computer is shown in the info display in the instrument cluster.

Calling up information on the info display

Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information on the info display: Range. Average fuel consumption. Average speed. Date. Speed limit detection. Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Distance to destination. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Arrow view of navigation system.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis play is inactive.

ECO PRO bonus range.

Adjusting the info display You can select what information from the on board computer is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.

1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km. If there is only enough fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display changes.

Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the period during which the engine is running. The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the onboard computer.

Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped do not enter into the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values Press and hold the computer button on the turn signal lever.

Seite 91

Displays Controls

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Distance to destination The distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navi gation system before the trip is started. The distance to the destination is adopted au tomatically.

Time of arrival The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is en tered in the navigation system before the trip is started. The time must be correctly set.

Speed limit detection Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page 89, function.

Speed limit Display of a speed limit which, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued. The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning at:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is

displayed. 5. Press the controller. The speed limit is stored.

Activating/deactivating the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning" 4. Press the controller.

Setting your current speed as the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Select current speed" 4. Press the controller.

The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit.

Trip computer The vehicle features two types of computer. "Onboard info": the values can be reset as

often as necessary. "Trip computer": the values provide an

overview of the current trip.

Resetting the trip computer 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a standstill.

Display on the Control Display Display the onboard computer or trip computer on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the fuel consumption or speed 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" 4. "Yes"

Seite 92

Controls Displays

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Settings on the Control Display Time

Setting the time zone 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time zone" 4. Select the desired time zone. The time zone is stored.

Setting the time 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours

are displayed. 5. Press the controller. 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi

nutes are displayed. 7. Press the controller. The time is stored.

Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. The time format is stored.

Date

Setting the date 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Date:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is

displayed.

5. Press the controller. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year. The date is stored.

Setting the date format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. The date format is stored.

Language

Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Language:" 4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 24.

Units of measure

Setting the units of measure To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance and temperature:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. Select the desired menu item. 4. Select the desired unit. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Seite 93

Displays Controls

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Brightness

Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright

ness is set. 5. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Depending on the light conditions, the bright ness control may not be clearly visible.

Seite 94

Controls Displays

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Lamps Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance

1 Rear fog lamps 2 Front fog lamps 3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive

Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Wel come lamps, Daytime running lights

4 Lamps off, daytime running lights 5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights 6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam

Assistant 7 Instrument lighting

Parking lamps/low beams, headlamp control General information Switch position: 0, ,

If the driver door is opened with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automati cally switched off at these switch settings.

Parking lamps Switch position : the vehicle lamps light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 96.

Low beams Switch position with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up.

Welcome lamps When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in position or : the parking and interior lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un locked.

Activating/deactivating 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Welcome lights" The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Headlamp courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while after the ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.

Seite 95

Lamps Controls

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Setting the duration 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Pathway lighting:" 4. Set the duration. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Automatic headlamp control Switch position : the low beams are switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. The low beams always stay on when the fog lamps are switched on.

Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg ment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually under these conditions.

Daytime running lights With the ignition switched on, the daytime run ning lights light up in position 0, or . After the ignition is switched off, the parking lamps light up in position .

Activating/deactivating In some countries, daytime running lights are compulsory, so it may not be possible to deac tivate the daytime running lights.

1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting"

3. "Daytime running lamps" The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Roadside parking lamps

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Adaptive light control The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road. In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.

Activating Switch position with the ignition switched on.

Seite 96

Controls Lamps

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is active.

Self-leveling headlamps The self-leveling headlamps compensate for acceleration and braking operations in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High-beam Assistant The concept When the low beams are switched on, this sys tem automatically switches the high beams on and off or suppresses the light in the areas that blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con trolled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traf fic situation allows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating

1. Turn the light switch to . 2. Press the button on the turn signal lever,

arrow. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When the lights are switched on, the

high beams are switched on and off automati cally. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

The blue indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams. Depend

ing on the version of the system in the vehicle, the high beams may not switch off for oncom ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case, the blue indicator light will stay on.

Switching the high beams on and off manually

High beams on, arrow 1.

Seite 97

Lamps Controls

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light. To reacti vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but ton on the turn signal lever.

System limits Personal responsibility The high-beam assistant cannot serve as

a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, manually switch off the high beams in situa tions where this is required to avoid a safety risk.

The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary: In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation. In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as

pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.

In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on coming traffic on freeways.

In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs.

At low speeds. When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered with stickers, etc.

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Fog lamps Front fog lamps The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on.

Press the button. The green indicator lamp lights up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 96, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lamps.

Instrument lighting Adjusting

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel.

Seite 98

Controls Lamps

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Interior lamps General information The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps and courtesy lamps are controlled automati cally. The brightness of some of these lamps is influ enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting.

1 Interior lamps 2 Reading lamp

Switching the interior lamps on and off

Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Switch back on: press button.

Reading lamps Press the button.

Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps. When the interior lamps are switched off per manently, the reading lamps cannot be switched on.

Bang & Olufsen High End Surround Sound System

Adjusting speaker lighting Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated. The lighting can be individually set.

1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "B & O" 4. Select the desired lighting setting.

"Off": no lighting. "Reduced": the speakers in the field of

view are hidden while driving. "On": the speakers are always illumi

nated.

Ambient light Depending on the equipment, the lighting can be individually adjusted in the interior for some lights.

Selecting color scheme 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Ambient:" 4. Select the desired setting. If the color scheme of the line is selected and the welcome lamps are activated, the welcome lamps are displayed in color when unlocking the vehicle.

Setting the brightness The brightness of the ambient light can be ad justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting but also independently of it.

1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Brightness:" 4. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 99

Lamps Controls

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Safety Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip

ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 2 Front airbag, front passenger 3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag 5 Knee airbags

Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade quate restraint.

Side airbags In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.

Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.

Seite 100

Controls Safety

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags

Keep at a distance from the airbags. Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig gered.

There should be no people, animals, or ob jects between an airbag and a person.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navi gation instruments and mobile phones.

Make sure that the front passenger is sit ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.

Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.

Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.

Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Do not remove the steering wheel. Do not apply adhesive materials to the air

bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way.

Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.

Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, there is the danger of burns. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explo sives. Non-professional attempts to service the sys tem could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

When the ignition is switch on, the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates

the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning Warning lamp does not come on when the

ignition is turned on. The warning lamp lights up continuously.

Seite 101

Safety Controls

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately

When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as expected in the event of an accident despite corresponding severity of the accident.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas senger seat is occupied by measuring the re sistance of the human body. The front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated accordingly.

Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger

keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.

Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front pas senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in structions under Children on the front passen ger seat.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deacti vated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags lights up. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To make sure that the occupied seat cushion can be evaluated correctly

Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.

Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.

Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.

Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac tivated or deactivated.

The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix ing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not acti vated.

The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are ac tivated.

Seite 102

Controls Safety

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Detected child seats The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, especially in the child seats that were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front passenger airbag The strength with which the driver's and front passenger airbags are triggered depends on the position of the driver's and front passenger seats. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a corresponding message appears on the Con trol Display.

Calibrating the front seats A corresponding message appears on the Control Display.

1. Move the respective seat forward all the way.

2. Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disap pears. If the message continues to be displayed, re peat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a re peat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Unobstructed area of movement Ensure that the area of movement of the

seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The system does not measure the actual infla tion pressure in the tires. It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving. In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; other wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en sured. Initialize the system after each correc tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" The status is displayed.

Initialization The initialization process adopts the set infla tion tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Perform reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away.

Seite 103

Safety Controls

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire

inflation pressure.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 208, are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if necessary.

System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: When the system has not been initialized.

When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface.

Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration.

When driving with snow chains.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions.

Seite 104

Controls Safety

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept The system monitors tire pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire valves measure the tire pressure and tire tem perature.

Hints Tire damage due to external factors Sudden tire damage caused by external

influences cannot be indicated in advance.

Pay attention to the other information and indi cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 199, as well when using the system.

Functional requirements The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en sured. Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly.

Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" The status is displayed.

Status display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display.

All wheels green System is active and will issue a warning rela tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire.

Seite 105

Safety Controls

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

All wheels are yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires.

Wheels, gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: The system is being reset. Malfunction.

Additional information The status display additionally shows the cur rent tire inflation pressures and tire tempera tures. The values shown are current measure ment values and may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions.

Carry out reset Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Perform reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Carry out the reset with "Perform reset". 6. Drive away. The tires are shown in gray and the status is displayed. After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the tire inflation pressures set are accepted as reference values. The reset is completed automatically during driving. After a successfully completed Reset, the wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is displayed. The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the reset resumes automati cally.

Low tire pressure message The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in

tire inflation pressure. No reset was performed for the system.

The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire pressures before the last reset.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 208, are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, it is possible that a reset was not carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In that case, carry out a reset. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys tem, may damage the TPM wheel elec

Seite 106

Controls Safety

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

tronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if necessary.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, it is possible that a reset was not carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In that case, carry out a reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.

Required inflation pressure check message A Check Control message is displayed. Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out a reset of the system. In some cases, a wheel was changed without having carried out a reset.

System limits The system does not function properly if a re set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is reported even though the tire inflation pres sures are correct. The tire pressure depends on the temperature of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g., due to driving or because of the heat of the Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also. The tire pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. This behavior may cause a warning to be issued if temperatures fall very sharply.

Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check

Seite 107

Safety Controls

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Control message is displayed. No flat tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.

Display in the following situations: A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:

have the service center check it if neces sary.

Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center.

TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.

Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the disturbance, the system auto matically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi cator to indicate when the system is not oper ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunc tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi nated. This sequence will continue upon sub sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replace ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Intelligent Safety The concept Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In telligent Safety consists of one or more of the following systems, which can help to avoid an imminent collision. These systems are active automatically every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button: Collision warning, refer to page 109. Pedestrian warning, refer to page 114.

Note Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi

tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation.

Seite 108

Controls Safety

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident is still possible despite all warnings.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off The Intelligent Safety systems are automati cally active after each engine start via the start/ stop button.

Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED goes out.

Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED lights up.

Settings can be made on the Control Display.

Collision warning Depending on how the equipment is equipped, the collision warning system consists of one of the two systems: Collision warning with City Braking func

tion, refer to page 109; Collision warning with braking function, re

fer to page 111

Collision warning with City Braking function The concept The system can help to prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system helps to reduce the collision speed. The system issues a warning if there is immi nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde pendently. The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration. The system is controlled via a camera in the base of the mirror. The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. When the vehicle is intentionally brought close to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings.

General information The system issues a two-phase warning of a danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation. Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter vention occurs when appropriate.

Detection range

Vehicles are observed when they are traveling in the same direction of movement if they are

Seite 109

Safety Controls

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

located within the detection range of the sys tem.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but ton.

Switching off The system is only switched off until the next time the engine is started with the Start/Stop button.

Press the button. The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver

of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

Display If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn ing. Increase braking and distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn ing. You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive ma neuver.

Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself to in tervene. During the warning, the maximum braking force is used, even with light pressure on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can assist with a slight braking intervention. The intervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a complete stop. Manual transmission: During a braking inter vention up until reaching a complete stop, the engine may be shut down. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated. The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov ing the steering wheel. When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch off the collision warning with braking function to prevent undesired interventions.

System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may

be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan ger of an accident occurring.

Seite 110

Controls Safety

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Detection range The system's detection capabilities are limited. This may result in the warning not being is sued or being issued late. For example, the following situations may not be detected: Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed. Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you or sharply decelerating vehicles. Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. Pedestrians.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow

fall. In tight curves. If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, for example, DSC OFF.

If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen sor is dirty or obscured.

During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle shipment.

If there is constant dimming because of oncoming light, for example, from the sun low in the sky.

Prewarning sensitivity Depending on the set prewarning time, this may result in increased false warnings.

Collision warning with braking function The concept The system issues a warning if there is immi nent danger of a collision and also includes a braking function. If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is controlled via the cruise control radar sensor in conjunction with a camera. The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. When the vehicle is intentionally brought close to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings.

General information The system issues a two-phase warning of a possible danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation.

Detection range

It responds to stationary or moving objects that are within the detection range of the radar system.

Seite 111

Safety Controls

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Radar sensor

The radar sensor is located in the lower area of the front bumper. Always keep radar sensor clean and unob structed.

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but ton.

Switching off The system is only switched off until the next time the engine is started with the Start/Stop button.

Press the button. The LED goes out.

Display

Warning stages

Prewarning This warning is issued, for example, when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed. The acute warning prompts the driver to inter vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is accompanied by a braking intervention. The braking intervention may be executed with maximum braking force and for a brief period only as necessary. The intervention can bring the vehicle to a complete stop. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated.

Seite 112

Controls Safety

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the braking intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure. No automatic delay occurs.

Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver

of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov ing the steering wheel. When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch off the collision warning with braking function to prevent undesired interventions.

Display in the instrument cluster The collision warning can be issued in the in strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and acoustically.

Warning stages

Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn ing. Increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn ing. You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive ma neuver.

Adapting your speed and driving style The display does not relieve the driver of

the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may

be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan ger of an accident occurring.

Detection range The system's detection capabilities are limited. This may result in the warning not being is sued or being issued late. For example, the following situations may not be detected: Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed. Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you or sharply decelerating vehicles. Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. Pedestrians.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow

fall. In tight curves. If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, for example, DSC OFF.

If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen sor is dirty or obscured.

During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle shipment.

If there is constant dimming because of oncoming light, for example, from the sun low in the sky.

Seite 113

Safety Controls

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Prewarning sensitivity Depending on the set prewarning time, this may result in increased false warnings.

Pedestrian warning Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the function warns of an imminent collision with pedestrians during daytime or nighttime. The function is subdivided into the following systems: During daytime: Pedestrian warning with

city braking function, refer to page 114 At night: Night Vision with pedestrian de

tection, refer to page 116

Pedestrian warning with city braking function The concept The system can help to prevent accidents with pedestrians. The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a col lision with pedestrians and includes a braking function. The system is controlled via the camera in the base of the interior mirror.

General information The system issues a warning with brightness staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and assists with a brake intervention shortly before a collision. It responds to persons that are within the de tection range of the system.

Detection range

The warning area in front of the vehicle is div ided into two areas. Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle. Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo cated within the central area. A warning is is sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Seite 114

Controls Safety

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but ton.

Switching off Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED goes out.

Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED lights up.

Warning with braking function Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver

of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

Display If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

The red symbol is displayed and a sig nal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or making an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself to in tervene. During the warning, the maximum braking force is used, even with light pressure on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can assist with a slight braking intervention. The intervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a complete stop. Manual transmission: During a braking inter vention up until reaching a complete stop, the engine may be shut down. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated. The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov ing the steering wheel. When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch off the pedestrian warning to prevent undesired interventions.

System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may

be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan ger of an accident occurring.

Detection range The detection capability of the camera is lim ited. This may result in the warning not being is sued or being issued late. For example, the following situations may not be detected: Partially covered pedestrians.

Seite 115

Safety Controls

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.

Pedestrians outside of the detection range. Pedestrians below a body size of approx.

32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow

fall. In tight curves. If the camera view field or the front wind

shield are dirty or covered. When driving toward bright lights. Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en

gine, via the Start/Stop knob. During calibration of the camera immedi

ately after vehicle shipment.

Night Vision with Pedestrian and Animal Detection The concept Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec tion is a night vision system. An infrared camera records the area in front of the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedestrians and animals on the street. Warm objects that are similar in shape to human be ings or animals are detected by the system. If necessary, the heat image can be displayed on the Control Display.

Heat image

The image shows the heat radiated by objects in the field of view of the camera. Warm objects have a light appearance and cold objects, a dark appearance. The ability to detect an object depends on the temperature difference between the object and the background and on the level of heat radiation emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in temperature to the environment or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de tect.

For safety reasons, when driving at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi ent light, the image is only displayed when the low beams are switched on. A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a fraction of a second.

Pedestrian and animal detection

Object detection and warning only functions in darkness. Warm objects that are similar in shape to hu man beings are detected by the system.

Seite 116

Controls Safety

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

In addition, the system also detects animals above a certain minimum size, e.g., deer. With heat image activated on the Control Dis play: People detected by the system are displayed with a slight yellow hue. Animals detected by the system are displayed in a darker yellow.

Under good ambient conditions, the object de tection operates within the following distance ranges: Pedestrian detection: up to approx.

330 ft/100 m Detection of large animals: up to approx.

490 ft/150 m Detection of medium animals: up to ap

prox. 230 ft/70 m Environmental influences can limit the availa bility of object detection. If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is located in a residential area, the animal detec tion is temporarily switched off.

Notes Personal responsibility Night Vision cannot replace the driver's

personal judgment of the visibility conditions and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the actual visibility conditions must always be the basis on which the vehicle speed is ad justed; otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.

At a glance

Buttons in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switch on/switch off heat image

Camera

The camera is automatically heated when the external temperatures are low. The camera is automatically cleaned together with the headlamps.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically Every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button, the system is automatically active at dark.

Switching off The system is only switched off until the next time the engine is started with the Start/Stop button.

Seite 117

Safety Controls

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Press the button.

The LED goes out.

Switching on heat image additionally The heat image from the Night Vision camera can also be displayed on the Control Display. This function has no effect on object detec tion.

Press the button.

The image from the camera is displayed on the Control Display.

Adjustments via the iDrive With heat image switched on:

1. Press the controller. 2. Select brightness or contrast.

Select the symbol. Select the symbol.

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.

Display

Warning of people or animals in danger If a collision with a person or an animal de tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym bol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. Although both the shape and the heat radiation are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.

Warning area in front of the vehicle

The warning area for the pedestrian warning consists of two parts: Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle. Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left. In the animal warning, no distinction is made between the central or expanded area. The entire area moves along with the vehicle in the direction of the steering angle and changes with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed increases, the area becomes longer and wider, for example.

Prewarning The yellow symbol is displayed when a person is detected in the central area, arrow 1, immediately in front of the ve

hicle. The yellow symbol is displayed when a person in the extended area, arrow 2, is moving from the right or left towards the central area. The displayed symbol can vary with the people detected. Intervene actively by braking or making an eva sive maneuver.

When animals are detected, an animal symbol is displayed. The symbol also shows the side of the road on which

the animal was detected. Intervene actively by braking or making an evasive maneuver.

Seite 118

Controls Safety

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Acute warning The red symbol is displayed and a sig nal sounds. Intervene immediately by braking or

making an evasive maneuver. With animals no acute warning occurs.

Display in the Head-up Display The warning is displayed simultane ously in the Head-up Display and on the instrument cluster. The displayed

symbol can vary with the people detected. When animals are detected, an animal symbol is displayed.

System limits

Basic limits System operation is limited in situations such as the following: On steep hills, in steep depressions or in

tight curves. When the camera is dirty or the protective

glass is damaged. In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. At very high external temperatures.

Limits of pedestrian and animal detection In some situations, it may occur that pedes trians are detected as animals or animals as pedestrians. Small animals are not detected by the object detection function, even if they are clearly visi ble in the image. Limited detection: People or animals who are fully or partially

covered, especially when their heads are covered.

People who are not in an upright position, e.g., lying down.

Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., recumbent bicycles).

After physical damage to the system, e.g., after an accident.

No display on the rear screen The image from Night Vision with people de tection cannot be displayed on the rear screen.

Lane departure warning The concept Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts you when the vehicle on streets with lane markings is about to leave the lane. Depending on the country-specific version of the vehicle, the speed is between 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h. If the system is switched on below this speed, a message appears in the in strument cluster. The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the event of warnings. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving sit uation. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane.

Notes Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi cle.

Seite 119

Safety Controls

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Lane departure warning

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display in the instrument cluster Lines: system is activated.

Arrows: at least one lane marking was de tected and warnings can be issued.

Display in the instrument display Symbol red: system is activated. Symbol green: at least one lane

marking was detected and warn ings can be issued.

Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi brating. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.

End of warning The warning ends: Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. When returning to your own lane. When braking hard. When using the turn signal.

System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg

ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas.

When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water.

In tight curves or on narrow lanes. When the lane markings are covered by

objects. When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you. When driving toward bright lights.

Seite 120

Controls Safety

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered with stickers, etc.

During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle shipment.

Active Blind Spot Detection The concept

Two radar sensors below the rear bumper monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The system indicates whether there are vehi cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up dimly.

Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the sit uations described above. The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.

Notes Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi

tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident is still possible despite all warnings.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Active Blind Spot Detection

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper.

Switching on/off Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Seite 121

Safety Controls

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Display

Information stage The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind.

Warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes brightly. The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone.

System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

much faster than your own. In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. In tight curves or on narrow lanes. If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered

with stickers. A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov erned by the following: FCC ID:

NBG009014A. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful inter

ference, and this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Brake force display The concept

During normal brake application, the outer brake lamps light up.

During heavy brake application, the inner brake lamps light up in addition.

Active Protection General information The Active Protection safety package consists of systems that are independent of each other: Attentiveness assistant. PreCrash PostCrash

Seite 122

Controls Safety

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Attentiveness assistant

The concept The system can detect increasing lack of alert ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo notonous journeys, for example, on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver take a break.

Note Personal responsibility The system cannot act as a substitute for

the personal assessment of one's physical state and may not detect an increasing lack of alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de tected too late and an accident be caused as a result.

Function The system is activated each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off. After travel has begun, the system is trained about the driver, so that increasing lack of alertness or fatigue can be detected. This procedure takes the following criteria into account: Personal driving style, for example, steer

ing behavior. Driving conditions, for example, length of

trip. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommen dation to take a break.

Break recommendation If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break. A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip.

After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi mately 45 minutes.

System limits The function may be limited in the following situations, for instance, and will either output an incorrect warning or no warning at all: When the clock is set incorrectly. When the vehicle speed is mainly below

about 43 mph/70 km/h. With a sporty driving style, such as during

rapid acceleration or when cornering quickly.

In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently.

When the road surface is poor. In the event of strong side winds.

PreCrash

The concept With this system critical driving situations that might result in an accident can be detected above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In these situations, preventative protection measures are automatically undertaken to minimize the risk in the event of an accident as much as possible. Critical driving situations may include: Full brake applications. Severe understeering. Severe oversteering. If the vehicle includes the collision warning or collision warning with braking feature, impend ing collisions with vehicles driving ahead or stopped in front of you can also be detected within the system's range.

Seite 123

Safety Controls

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Note Personal responsibility The system cannot possibly serve as a

substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system may not al ways detect critical situations reliably and in a timely manner. Adapt speed to traffic situation and drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety may result.

Function After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts are automatically pretensioned once after the vehicle is driven is away. In critical driving situations, the following indi vidual functions become active as needed: The front belts are automatically preten

sioned. Automatic closing of the windows. Automatic closing of the glass sunroof. For vehicles equipped with Comfort Seats:

automatic positioning of the backrest for the front passenger seat.

For vehicles equipped with Comfort Seats in the rear: automatic positioning of the backrests for the rear passenger seats.

After a critical driving situation without an acci dent, the front belts are loosened again. All other systems can be restored to the desired setting. If the belt tension does not loosen automati cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the belt before continuing on your trip.

PostCrash In the event of an accident, the system can bring the car to a halt automatically without in tervention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof.

Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic braking. Depressing the accelerator pedal also interrupts automatic braking. After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll ing.

Seite 124

Controls Safety

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Driving stability control systems Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en gine.

Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. This then reduces braking dis tance to a minimum during full braking. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking. When equipped with Driving Assistant Plus or with Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC is supported by the braking in tervention if there is a possible risk of collision. To do this, the braking force is automatically increased if the braking pressure is insufficient when the brakes are applied.

Adaptive brake assistant In combination with the Active Cruise Control, this system ensures that the brakes respond even more rapidly when braking in critical sit uations.

Drive-off assistant This system supports driving away on gradi ents. The parking brake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive away without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is being used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driv

ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine

Seite 125

Driving stability control systems Controls

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

speed and by applying brakes at individual wheels.

Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.

Indicator/warning lamps The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con trols the drive forces and brake forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has

failed.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in bends. Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering system are only performed by the rear axle steering. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC Press and hold the button, but not lon ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. The DSC system is switched off.

Activating DSC Press the button. DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lamps When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized. The system ensures maximum forward mo mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim ited. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri ate caution. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads. When rocking the vehicle or driving off in

deep snow or on loose surfaces. When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction on loose ground. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.

Activating DTC Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru

ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up.

Seite 126

Controls Driving stability control systems

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Deactivating DTC Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica

tor lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lamps When DTC is activated, TRACTION is dis played in the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy namic Traction Control is activated.

xDrive xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis tributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface.

HDC Hill Descent Control The concept HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto matically controls vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients. Without applying the brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than walking speed. Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed to approx. walking speed and then keeps its speed constant. As long as there is active braking, the system is on standby. The system does not brake the vehicle during this time. Use HDC in low gears or in transmission posi tion D or R only.

Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed Specify desired speed in the range from ap prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h using the rocker switch of the cruise control on the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be changed by lightly accelerating.

Press up the rocker switch to the point of resistance: the speed increases gradually.

Press up the rocker switch past the point of resistance: the speed increases while the rocker switch is pressed.

Press down the rocker switch to the point of resistance: the speed decreases gradu ally.

Press down the rocker switch past the point of resistance: when driving forward, the speed decreases to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h.

Activating HDC

Press the button; the LED above the but ton lights up.

Seite 127

Driving stability control systems Controls

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Deactivating HDC Press the button again and the LED goes out. HDC is automatically deactivated

above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.

Display in the instrument cluster The selected speed is displayed in the speedometer. Green: the system is actively

braking the vehicle. Orange: the system is on

standby.

Malfunction A message is displayed in the instrument clus ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated brake temperatures.

Adaptive Drive The concept Adaptive Drive includes the following systems: Dynamic Drive, refer to page 128. Dynamic Damping Control, refer to

page 128. The system increases driving stability and driv ing comfort.

Dynamic Drive The concept Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in curves or during quick evasive maneuvers. Driving stability and driving comfort are in creased under all driving conditions. The sys tem utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear axles that react immediately to all driv ing situations.

Programs The system offers two different programs. The programs can be selected via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 130.

SPORT Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.

COMFORT Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.

Dynamic Damping Control The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav eling on uneven road surfaces. The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort as required for the road surface and driving style.

Programs The system offers several different programs. The programs can be selected via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 130.

SPORT/SPORT+ Consistently sporty control of the shock ab sorbers for greater driving agility.

COMFORT/ECO PRO Balanced tuning between the COMFORT+ and SPORT/SPORT+ programs.

COMFORT+ Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorb ers for optimal traveling comfort.

Seite 128

Controls Driving stability control systems

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Integral Active Steering The concept Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac tive Steering and rear axle steering. Active Steering varies the steering angle of the wheels in relation to the steering wheel move ment as a function of the speed. At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g., in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e., steering becomes more direct. The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a direction opposite to the front wheels. At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas ingly reduced. The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as the front wheels. In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can specifically steer the front and rear wheels to stabilize the vehicle before the driver inter venes, e.g., when braking where road condi tions differ on the left and right sides of the ve hicle.

Initializing In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi alize the Integral Active Steering.

The warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.

1. With the engine running, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right sev eral times in a uniform manner until the warning lamp disappears.

2. Have the system checked if the warning lamp does not go out after moving the steering wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering wheel is at an angle.

Using snow chains

Note When snow chains are in use, refer to page 209, rear wheel steering is deactivated.

Programs The system offers several different programs. The programs can be selected via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 130.

SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Ac tive Steering for greater driving agility.

COMFORT Balanced tuning between the COMFORT+ and SPORT programs.

COMFORT+ Consistently comfort-oriented tuning of the In tegral Active Steering for optimal traveling comfort.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle responds more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the higher speed range. The stability-enhancing intervention may be deactivated. Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. Have the system checked.

Self-leveling suspension The concept The self-leveling suspension keeps the vehicle height and ground clearance constant. The height of the vehicle at the rear axle is main tained at a predefined level under all load con ditions.

Seite 129

Driving stability control systems Controls

129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

The system ensures consistent comfort by keeping spring travel constant in all driving sit uations.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. A mal function has occurred in the self-leveling sus pension. Vehicle handling may be altered and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced. Visit your nearest service center.

Driving Dynamics Control The concept The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. For this purpose various programs are available for selection that are activated via the two buttons of the Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC OFF-button.

Operating the programs

Press the button Program

DSC OFF TRACTION

SPORT+ SPORT COMFORT COMFORT+ ECO PRO

Automatic program change The system may automatically switch to COM FORT in the following situations: Failure of Integral Active Steering. Failure of Dynamic Damping Control. The vehicle has a flat tire.

DSC OFF Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends. Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering system are only performed by the rear axle steering. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF Press and hold the button, but not lon ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in the tachometer. The DSC system is switched off.

Activating DSC Press the button. DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lamps When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis played in the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF is activated.

TRACTION Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv ing stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.

Activating TRACTION Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the tach

ometer. The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus ter lights up.

Seite 130

Controls Driving stability control systems

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Deactivating TRACTION Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC indicator

lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lamps When TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is displayed in the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: TRAC TION is activated.

SPORT+ Sporty driving with optimized chassis and adapted engine control with limited driving sta bilization. Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks.

Activating SPORT+ Press the button repeatedly until SPORT+ appears in the tachometer

and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Automatic program change When switching on the adjustable speed limit or activating cruise control, the program auto matically switches to SPORT mode.

Indicator/warning lamps SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: Dynamic Traction Control is activated.

SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension and engine control for greater driving agility with maximum driving stabilization.

The program can be configured to individual specifications. The configuration is stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Activating SPORT Press the button repeatedly until SPORT appears in the tachometer.

Configuring SPORT When the display is activated on the Control Display, refer to page 132, the SPORT driving mode can be set. After the SPORT driving mode is activated, se lect "Configure SPORT" on the displayed panel and configure the program. SPORT can also be configured before it is acti vated:

1. "Settings" 2. "SPORT mode" or: "Driving mode" 3. Configure driving mode. This configuration is retrieved when the SPORT driving mode is activated.

COMFORT For a balanced tuning with maximum driving stabilization.

Activating COMFORT Press the button repeatedly until the program display in the tachometer

goes out.

In certain situations, the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program, automatic program change, refer to page 130.

COMFORT+ Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorb ers and adapted engine control for optimal traveling comfort with maximum driving stabili zation.

Seite 131

Driving stability control systems Controls

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Activating COMFORT+ Press the button repeatedly until COMFORT+ appears in the tachome

ter.

ECO PRO ECO PRO, refer to page 189, provides consis tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for maximum range with maximum driving stabili zation. Comfort functions and the engine controller are adjusted. The program can be configured to individual specifications.

Activating ECO PRO Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" Make the desired settings.

Configure driving mode Settings can be made for the following driving modes in Driving mode: SPORT mode, refer to page 131. ECO PRO mode, refer to page 190.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Selected program The selected program is dis played in the tachometer.

Program selection Pressing the button displays a list of the selectable programs.

Display on the Control Display Program changes can be displayed briefly on the Control Display. To do so, make the following settings:

1. "Settings" 2. "Driving mode" 3. "Driving mode info"

Seite 132

Controls Driving stability control systems

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Driving comfort Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC The concept This system can be used to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automati cally on clear roads. To the extent possible, the system automati cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you. The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the system au tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead begins moving faster. If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to accelerate if operated accordingly. Even if some time passes before the vehicle drives away again, the BMW can still be accel erated automatically and simply. As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the desired speed. The speed is also maintained on downhill gra dients, but may not be maintained on uphill slopes if engine power is insufficient.

General information When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is also set to a driving style that saves on fuel consumption.

Notes Personal responsibility The system does not relieve the driver of

the responsibility to adapt his or her speed, distance and driving style to the traffic condi tions. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic events. Intervene actively when neces sary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger of an accident.

At a glance

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press the button

Function

Cruise control on/off, interrupt ing, refer to page 134

Store/maintain speed, refer to page 135

Resume speed, refer to page 136

Reduce distance, refer to page 136

Increase distance, refer to page 136

Adjust distance, refer to page 136

Seite 133

Driving comfort Controls

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Press the button

Function

Rocker switch: Change/maintain speed, refer to page 135

Congestion Assistant ON/OFF, Pause, refer to page 139

The arrangement of the buttons varies accord ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun try-specific variants.

Radar sensor A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle.

A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de tection of vehicles.

If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re move layers of snow and ice carefully.

Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor.

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.

The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up and the marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used.

Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or inter

rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc curring.

If switching off the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time.

Press the button on the steering wheel.

If active: press twice. If interrupted: press once.

Seite 134

Controls Driving comfort

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

The displays go out. The stored desired speed and distance are deleted.

Interrupting Press the button on the steering wheel.

If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: When the brakes are applied. When transmission position D is disen

gaged. When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is

activated or DSC is deactivated. When DSC is actively controlling stability. If the safety belt and the driver's door are

opened when the vehicle is standing still. If the system has not detected objects for

an extended period, e.g., on a road with very little traffic without road edge line markings.

If the detection range of the radar is dis rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog.

Maintaining/storing the speed Press the button. Or:

Press the rocker switch while the system is in terrupted.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the instrument cluster, refer to page 137. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Changing, maintaining, and storing the speed The rocker switch can be pressed while the system is interrupted to maintain and store the current speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc curring.

Speed differences Large differences in speed relative to

other vehicles cannot be compensated by the system for example in the following situations: When catching up rapidly with a truck. When another vehicle suddenly swerves

into the wrong lane. When stationary objects are approached at

speed.

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set.

Seite 135

Driving comfort Controls

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. Each time the rocker switch is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action.

Distance Selecting a distance Adjust the distance according to the traf

fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.

Reduce distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

The selected distance, refer to page 137, is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Increase distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

The selected distance, refer to page 137, is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Adjust distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

Calling up the desired speed and distance

While driving Press the button with the system switched on.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: When the system is switched off. When the ignition is switched off.

While standing Before leaving the vehicle, secure it against rolling

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning, engage position P of the automatic trans mission and apply the parking brake. Other wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

The system brought the vehicle to a complete standstill. Green marking in the speedometer:

Your vehicle accelerates automatically as soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra dar sensor moves off.

Marking in the speedometer turns orange: no automatic driving away. To accelerate to the desired speed auto matically, press the accelerator briefly or press the RES or SET button.

Rolling bars in the distance display indicate that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection range has moved off. Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle:

1. Press the button to call up a stored desired speed.

2. Release the brake pedal.

Seite 136

Controls Driving comfort

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the RES button or the rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed The marking lights up green:

the system is active. The marking lights up or

ange: the system has been interrupted.

The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.

With instrument display: the symbol is displayed in the speedometer similarly to the mark for the desired speed.

Brief status display Selected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys tem requirements for operation are currently not met.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you The selected distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you is shown.

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance display

Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on.

The system has been interrupted or distance control is deactivated be cause the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected.

Distance control is deactivated be cause the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was detected.

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away.

Indicator/warning lamps Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lamps do not

relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

The vehicle symbol lights up orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for operating the system.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively assume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.

The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: You are requested to intervene by

braking or making an evasive maneuver.

Displays in the Head-up Display The information from Active Cruise Control can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

Seite 137

Driving comfort Controls

137 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Adjusting the Head-up Display, refer to page 157.

System limits

Speed range Best results are achieved when using the sys tem on well-developed roads and highways. The desired speed can be selected between 20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h. The system can also be activated when sta tionary. Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit uation when using the system.

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.

Limited detection capacity Because of the limits to the detection ca

pacity of the camera and the sensor, you should be alert at all times so that you can in tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Deceleration The system does not decelerate for: Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road

users. Red traffic lights. Cross traffic.

Oncoming traffic.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

Swerving vehicles If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis tance. This also applies to major speed differ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu vers, if necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although curves cannot be anticipated in advance.

Seite 138

Controls Driving comfort

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. In tight curves, situations may result due to the restricted detection range of the system in which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be detected at all, or not until after a consider able delay.

When approaching a curve, the system may react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the vehicle by the system can be compensated for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator pedal is released, the system becomes active again and independently controls the speed.

Driving away In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or behind bumps in the road.

Radar sensor

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov erned by the following: FCC ID: OAYARS3-A Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful inter ference, and

this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example. A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails. The function for detecting and responding when approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in the following situation: During calibration of the camera immedi

ately after vehicle shipment. If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A

Check Control message is displayed.

Congestion Assistant The concept In congestion situations, the system controls the speed, steers independently and keeps the vehicle in the lane. To the extent possible, the system automati cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you. The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the sys tem automatically decelerates, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi cle ahead begins moving faster. When lane markings are detected, the system keeps the vehicle in the lane. For this purpose, the system steers independently as needed, for example, during cornering.

Seite 139

Driving comfort Controls

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

General information The congestion assistant determines speed and distance from the vehicle in front via a ra dar sensor and the position of the lane marking via a camera. Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether the steering wheel is being touched. The system is deactivated as soon as contact with the steering wheel is no longer detected. In order to be able to use the Congestion As sistant, place your hands around the steering wheel. When driving with gloves or with protective covers, contact with the steering wheel cannot be detected by the sensors. The system in this case cannot be used.

Notes Personal responsibility The system does not relieve the driver of

the responsibility to adapt his or her speed, distance and driving style to the traffic condi tions. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic events. Intervene actively when neces sary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger of an accident.

Functional requirements Drive on approved road type. The data on

this are stored in the navigation system. Driving on the limited access highway or

divided lane roads. Sufficient lane width. Lane marking is detected. Vehicle driving ahead is detected. Speed below 25 mph/40 km/h. Both hands on the steering wheel rim.

At a glance

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press the button

Function

Congestion Assistant ON/OFF, Pause, refer to page 141.

Rocker switch: Store, change/maintain speed, refer to page 135.

Maintain, store speed, refer to page 135.

Resume speed, refer to page 136.

Adjust distance, refer to page 136.

Radar sensor A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle.

A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de tection of vehicles.

If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re move layers of snow and ice carefully.

Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor.

Seite 140

Controls Driving comfort

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off and pausing

Switching on Press the button.

Prepare system: press once. Activate system:

The system is automatically activated be low 25 mph/40 km/h. If the ACC is not activated: press wiper. With ACC activated: system is ready.

If ACC is not activated: indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on.

If ACC is not activated: indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on.

Congestion Assistant can be used. With Congestion Assistant switched on, the Pedestrian Warning system is active.

Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or inter

rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth

erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc curring.

Press the button.

The indicator goes out. Stored desired speed and distance are still kept by the ACC. The system no longer steers independently.

Interrupting When active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: At a speed above 25 mph/40 km/h. With only one detected lane marking. When you leave the limited access high

way. When you leave the divided lane road. When the steering wheel is released. When steering intervention is active. When you leave your own lane. With incorrect vehicle ahead. When the turn signal is on.

Red flashing and signal tone: Congestion Assistant is interrupted. The system no longer steers independ

ently. ACC exercises control.

If the system conditions are met, the system reactivates automatically.

Distance Selecting a distance Adjust the distance according to the traf

fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.

Seite 141

Driving comfort Controls

141 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Adjust distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you The selected distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you is shown.

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on.

Selecting a distance Adjust the distance according to the traf

fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Symbol Description

Congestion Assistant and Distance Control on standby.

Congestion Assistant on standby. Distance control controls within the set distance.

Congestion Assistant activated. The system controls the speed and assists with maintaining the lane.

Symbol Description

Rolling bars: at least one functional requirement is no longer satisfied. The system soon deactivates the automatic steering. ACC on standby.

Red flashing and signal tone: con gestion Assistant is interrupted. The system does not steer inde pendently. ACC exercises control.

System limits When driving within narrow driving lanes, e.g., in construction zones or rescue lanes, the sys tem cannot be activated or meaningfully used.

Limited detection capacity Because of the limits to the detection ca

pacity of the camera and the sensor, you should be alert at all times so that you can in tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Complying with country-specific laws When the Congestion Assistant is used,

observe specific national laws.

Cruise control The concept The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if en gine braking action is insufficient.

Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable

conditions make it impossible to drive at a con stant speed, for instance: On curvy roads.

Seite 142

Controls Driving comfort

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

In heavy traffic. On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi cle and cause an accident.

General information When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is also set to a driving style that saves on fuel consumption.

Controls

At a glance

Press the button

Function

Cruise control on/off, interrupt ing, refer to page 143

Store/maintain speed, refer to page 143

Resume speed, refer to page 144

Rocker switch: Change/maintain speed, refer to page 144

The arrangement of the buttons varies accord ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun try-specific variants.

Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.

The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. The cruise control can be used.

Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or inter

rupted, actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Press the button on the steering wheel.

If active: press twice. If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting When active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted if: The brakes are applied. The transmission position D is disengaged. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

or DSC is deactivated. DSC is actively controlling stability. HDC is activated.

Maintaining/storing the current speed Press the button. Or:

Press the rocker switch while the system is in terrupted.

Seite 143

Driving comfort Controls

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the speedometer, refer to page 144. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Changing/maintaining speed The rocker switch can be pressed while the system is interrupted in order to maintain and store the current speed.

Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc curring.

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. Each time the rocker switch is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Max. adjustable speed: 140 mph/230 km/h.

Pressing the rocker switch to the resist ance point and holding it there accelerates or decelerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator. After the rocker switch is released, the vehicle main tains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the ve hicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speed Press the button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator lamp Depending on how the vehicle is equip ped, the indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster indicates whether the sys

tem is switched on.

Desired speed The marking lights up green:

the system is active. The marking lights up or

ange: the system has been interrupted.

The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.

With instrument display: the symbol is displayed in the speedometer similarly to the mark for the desired speed.

Brief status display Selected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys tem requirements for operation are currently not met.

Seite 144

Controls Driving comfort

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

PDC Park Distance Control The concept PDC supports you when parking. Objects that you are approaching slowly in front of or be hind your vehicle are indicated by: Signal tones. Visual display.

General information Measurements are made by ultrasound sen sors in the bumpers. The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given: By the front sensors and the two rear cor

ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m.

Notes Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the

driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci dent could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range. Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.

Avoid driving quickly with PDC Avoid approaching an object quickly.

Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active. For technical reasons, the system may other wise be too late in issuing a warning.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

PDC Park Distance Control

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary.

Switching on/off manually Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the rearview camera, refer to page 147, can be switched on.

Switching on the rearview camera via the iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on:

"Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Seite 145

Driving comfort Controls

145 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Display

Signal tones When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is de tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object be comes, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. If objects are located both in front of and be hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig nal is sounded. The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap prox. 3 seconds: If the vehicle stops in front of an object that

is detected by only one of the corner sen sors.

If moving parallel to a wall. The signal tone is switched off: When the vehicle moves away from an ob

ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. When transmission position P is engaged.

Volume The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted, refer to user's manual for Navigation, Enter tainment, Communication. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone sounds. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in the colors red, green and yellow. If the rearview camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:

1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display.

2. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

System limits

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physi cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.: With tow bars and trailer hitches. With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With low objects. With objects with corners and sharp edges. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected.

False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: In heavy rain. When sensors are very dirty or covered in

ice. When sensors are covered in snow. On rough road surfaces. In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga rages.

In heavy exhaust.

Seite 146

Controls Driving comfort

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded area on the Control Display. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. To ensure full operability: Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Surround View The concept Surround View comprises various camera as sistance systems that help the driver when parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits and intersections. Rearview camera, refer to page 147 Side View, refer to page 149. Top View, refer to page 151.

Backup camera The concept The backup camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

Hints Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci dent could result from road users or objects lo

cated outside the picture area of the backup camera.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Rearview camera

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of the trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 233.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. The backup camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive.

Seite 147

Driving comfort Controls

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary.

Switching on/off manually Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display.

Switching on the rearview camera via the iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on:

"Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement The rearview camera is switched on. The trunk lid is fully closed.

Activating the assistance functions More than one assistance function can be ac tive at the same time. Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines" Pathway and turning circle lines are dis played.

Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking"

Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Pathway lines

Can be shown in the rearview camera im age when in transmission position R.

Help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.

Are dependent on the current steering an gle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines

Can be shown in the rearview camera im age.

Show the course of the smallest possible turning circle on a level road.

Only one turning circle line is displayed when the steering wheel is turned.

Seite 148

Controls Driving comfort

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Obstacle marking

General information

Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in the rearview camera image.

Their colored steps match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance to the object shown.

Parking using pathway and turning circle lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir

cle lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line.

Display settings

Brightness With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

System limits

Detection of objects High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the rearview camera.

Side View The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected rela tively late from the driver's seat. To improve

Seite 149

Driving comfort Controls

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi cle record the traffic situation on each side.

Notes The images from both cameras are shown si multaneously on the Control Display.

Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located out side the picture area of the Side View cam eras.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Side View

Cameras

Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap ture the image. The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 233.

Switching on/off

Switching on/off manually Press the button.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary.

Display The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display.

Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle.

Brightness With the Side View switched on:

1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast With the Side View switched on:

1. "Contrast" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Seite 150

Controls Driving comfort

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

System limits The cameras capture a maximum range of 330 ft/100 m.

Top View The concept Top View assists you in parking and maneu vering. The area around the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Con trol Display for this purpose.

General information The image is captured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the backup camera. The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear. In this way, obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors are detected early.

Notes Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci dent could result from road users or objects lo cated outside the picture area of the cameras.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Top View

Cameras

The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 233.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary.

Switching on/off manually Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. Top View is displayed.

Seite 151

Driving comfort Controls

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive With Top View switched on:

"Rear view camera" The backup camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. When the distance to an object is small, a red bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC display.

The display appears as soon as Top View is activated.

If the rearview camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display when reverse gear is selected. To switch to Top View:

"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness With Top View switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast With Top View switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Displaying the turning circle and pathway lines The static, red turning circle line shows the

space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the way.

The variable, green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space ac tually needed to the side of the vehicle. The pathway line is dependent on the cur rent steering angle and is continuously ad justed with the steering wheel movement.

"Parking aid lines" Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

System limits Top View cannot be used in the following sit uations: With a door open. With the trunk lid open. With an exterior mirror folded in. In poor light. A Check Control message is displayed in some of these situations.

Seite 152

Controls Driving comfort

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Parking assistant The concept

This system assists the driver in parking paral lel to the road. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant calculates the best pos sible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure. When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information issued by the PDC and the parking assistant and react accordingly. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 145.

Hints Personal responsibility The parking assistant does not relieve

the driver of responsibility for the vehicle dur ing the parking procedure. Watch the parking space and parking proce dure closely and intervene if necessary; other wise, there is the danger of an accident.

Changes to the parking space Changes to the parking space after it was

measured are not taken into account by the system. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci dent occurring.

Transporting loads Loads that extend beyond the perimeter

of the vehicle are not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci dent occurring.

Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi

cle over or onto curbs. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi cle may become damaged.

An engine that has been switched off by the Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati cally when the parking assistant is activated.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces Maximum speed while driving forward ap

prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. Maximum distance to row of parked vehi

cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space Gap between two objects with a minimum

length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's

length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m. Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking procedure Closed doors. Parking brake released.

Seite 153

Driving comfort Controls

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Parking assistant

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors used to measure park ing spaces are located in the side turn signals. To ensure full operability: Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Switching on/off

Switching on with the button Press the button. The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with reverse gear Shift into reverse. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Activate: "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol in the Control Display.

Switching off The system can be deactivated as follows: Press the button.

Switch off the ignition.

Display on the Control Display

Activating/deactivating the system

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

Without Professional navigation system or TV: system status

The status is displayed with symbols.

Gray: parking space search. Blue: the system is activated. A suitable parking space was found.

Seite 154

Controls Driving comfort

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

The parking procedure is active. Steering control has been seized.

Status of the parking space search

Gray, arrow 1: parking space search. Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.

The vehicle is parked in the parking space if the parking procedure is active.

No display: no parking space search.

With navigation system professional or TV: status of the system

Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of the vehicle representation. Parking as sistant is activated and search for parking space active.

Suitable parking spaces are displayed next to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the road as on the Control Display. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.

The parking procedure is ac tive. Steering control has been seized.

Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forwards slow and straight, even if the system is de activated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant Check the traffic situation as well Loud sounds outside and within the vehi

cle can drown out the signal tones of the park ing assistant and PDC. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident.

1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti vate it if necessary. The status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis play. To achieve the best possible parking posi tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel movement after the gear change when the vehicle is stationary. The end of the parking procedure is indi cated on the Control Display.

3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec essary.

Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time: "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol

on the Control Display. Press the button.

Seite 155

Driving comfort Controls

155 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if

he takes over steering. If a gear is selected that does not match

the instruction on the Control Display. If a turn signal is activated in the opposite

direction to the desired side for parking. If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

6 mph/10 km/h. On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces

if necessary. If doors are open. When there are obstacles that are hard to

overcome, such as curbs. When there are obstacles that suddenly

arise. If a maximum number of parking attempts

or the time taken for parking is exceeded. A Check Control message is displayed.

Continuing An interrupted parking procedure can be con tinued if necessary. Follow the instructions on the Control Display to do this.

System limits

No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assis tance in the following situations: In tight curves.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: When sensors are dirty or iced over. In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.

On slippery ground. On steep uphill or downhill grades. When leaves or snow has collected in the

parking space.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physi cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in the following circumstances: With tow bars and trailer hitches. With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo. With objects with corners and sharp edges. With objects with a fine surface structure,

such as fences. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected. The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked.

Seite 156

Controls Driving comfort

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Head-up Display The concept

This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. In this way, the driver can get information with out averting his or her eyes from the road.

Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by: Certain sitting positions. Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis

play. Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. Wet roads. Unfavorable light conditions. If the image is distorted, check the basic set tings.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

Display

Overview Speed. Navigation system. Check Control messages. Collision warning. Speed limit detection. Cruise control. Distance information. Congestion Assistant. Pedestrian warning. Selection list from the instrument cluster. Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up Display 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Displayed information" 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up

Display. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller. When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad ditionally influenced using the instrument light ing. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Seite 157

Driving comfort Controls

157 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Adjusting the height 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Height" 4. Turn the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the rotation 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Rotation" 4. Turn the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. A film in the windshield prevents double im ages from being displayed. Therefore, have the special windshield re placed by a service center only.

Distance information The concept The system displays a symbol in the Head-up Display to indicate that the distance behind the vehicle in front is not sufficient.

General information The distance is determined by the radar sen sor of the Active Cruise Control.

Hints Personal responsibility The display does not relieve the driver of

the responsibility to adapt his or her distance and driving style to the traffic conditions. Main tain the prescribed safety distance.

At a glance

Radar sensor A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle.

A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de tection of vehicles.

If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re move layers of snow and ice carefully.

Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor.

Switching on 1. Switching on Head-Up Display, refer to

page 157. 2. "Distance info": Select the indication in the

Head-Up Display, refer to page 157.

Display in the Head-up Display The symbol is displayed when the dis tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is too short.

Functional requirements Active Cruise Control switched off.

Seite 158

Controls Driving comfort

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Display in the Head-up Display selected. Distance too short for longer than about

2 seconds. Speed greater than approx.

40 mph/70 km/h.

Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example. A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails.

Seite 159

Driving comfort Controls

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Climate control Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip

ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Automatic climate control

1 Air distribution, left 2 Temperature, left 3 AUTO program, left 4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, left, residual heat 5 Remove ice and condensation 6 Maximum cooling 7 Display 8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right 9 AUTO program, right 10 Temperature, right

11 Air distribution, right 12 Seat heating, right50 13 Active seat ventilation, right50 14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu

lated-air mode 15 Cooling function 16 Rear window defroster 17 SYNC program 18 Active seat ventilation, left50 19 Seat heating, left50

Seite 160

Controls Climate control

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Climate control functions in detail

Manual air distribution Press the button repeatedly to select a program:

Upper body region. Upper body region and footwell. Footwell. Windows and footwell. Windows, upper body region, and footwell. Windows: driver's side only. Windows and upper body region. If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the condensation sensor.

Temperature Turn the wheel to set the de sired temperature.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if neces sary with the maximum cooling or heating ca pacity, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli mate control will not have sufficient time to ad just the set temperature.

AUTO program Press the button. Air volume, air distribution, and tem

perature are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature, the AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell.

The cooling function, refer to page 162, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro gram. At the same time, a condensation sensor con trols the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible.

Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, auto matic control of the air flow and air distribution can be adjusted.

Press the left or right side of the but ton: decrease or increase the inten

sity.

The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.

Air flow, manual To be able to manually adjust the air flow, switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left or right side of the but ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Press the button. Ice and condensation are quickly re

moved from the windshield and the front side windows.

The air volume can be adjusted when the pro gram is active. If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen sor.

Seite 161

Climate control Controls

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest tem

perature, maximum air flow and air circulation mode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this. Air is cooled as quickly as possible: At an external temperature of approx.

32 /0 . When the engine is running. The air volume can be adjusted when the pro gram is active.

Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air

control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shutoff auto matically.

Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per manently blocked.

If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the con densation sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield.

Continuous recirculated-air mode The recirculated-air mode should not be

used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead ily.

Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running.

Press the button. The air is cooled and dehumidified

and depending on the temperature setting warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 184, devel ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Rear window defroster Press the button. The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

SYNC program The current settings on the driver's side for temperature, air flow, air distri

bution, and AUTO program are transferred to the front passenger side and to the left and right rear. The program is switched off if the settings on the front passenger side or in the rear are changed.

Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the interior.

Functional requirement Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been

switched off. Warm engine. The battery is sufficiently charged. External temperature below 77 /25 .

Seite 162

Controls Climate control

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Switching on 1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Press the right side of the button on the driver's side.

The symbol appears on the automatic cli mate Control Display. The interior temperature, air volume and air distribution can be adjusted with the ignition switched on.

Switching off At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's side.

The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes.

Switching the system on/off

Switching off Complete system:

Press and hold the left button on the driver's side until the control

clicks off. On the front passenger side:

Press and hold the left button on the front passenger side.

Switching on Press any button except: SYNC program. Rear window defroster. Left side of Air volume button. Seat heating. Seat ventilation.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle.

This combined filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 216, of your vehicle.

Ventilation Front ventilation

Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar row 1. Toward blue: colder. Toward red: warmer.

Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 2.

Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 3.

Ventilation levels Draft-free ventilation:

Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air current is fanned out.

Maximum air volume: Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air is partially fanned out and partially bundled. This maximizes the air supply.

Direct ventilation: Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air is bundled and can be directed to a specific point.

Adjusting the ventilation Ventilation for cooling:

Seite 163

Climate control Controls

163 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun.

Draft-free ventilation: Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

Ventilation in rear, center

Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar row 1. Toward blue: colder. Toward red: warmer.

Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 2.

Thumbwheels for continuous opening and closing of the vents, arrow 3.

Lateral ventilation

Thumbwheel for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrow 1.

Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 2.

Rear automatic climate control At a glance

1 Temperature 2 AUTO program 3 Vent settings 4 Air volume, AUTO intensity 5 Display 6 Maximum cooling 7 Seat heating53 8 Active seat ventilation53

Switching the rear automatic climate control on/off 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Rear climate control" The rear automatic climate control is not op erational if the automatic climate control is switched off or if the function for defrosting or defogging the windows is active.

AUTO program Press the button. Air volume, air distribution, and tem

perature are controlled automatically:

Depending on the selected temperature, the AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is directed to the upper body and into the foot well.

Seite 164

Controls Climate control

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program.

Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, auto matic control of the air volume and air distribu tion can be adjusted.

Press the left or right side of the but ton: decrease or increase the inten

sity.

The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.

Temperature Turn the wheel to set the de sired temperature.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if neces sary with the maximum cooling or heating ca pacity, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings. The automatic climate con trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

Manual air distribution The air distribution can be adjusted to individ ual needs.

Press the button repeatedly to select a program:

Upper body region. Upper body region and footwell. Footwell.

Air volume, manual To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left or right side of the but ton: decrease or increase air volume.

The selected air volume is shown on the dis play of the automatic climate control.

Switching the system on/off

Switching off Press and hold the left button.

Switching on Press any button except: Left side of Air volume button. Seat heating. Seat ventilation.

Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest tem

perature, maximum air flow and air circulation mode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper body region. Open them for this purpose. Air is cooled as quickly as possible: At an external temperature of approx.

32 /0 . When the engine is running.

Climate control operation on the headliner

Temperature Turn the wheel to set the de sired temperature.

Seite 165

Climate control Controls

165 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Air volume Press the left or right side of the but ton: decrease or increase air volume.

LEDs indicate the intensity of the air supply. The air volume may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Ventilation

Thumbwheel for changing the air flow direc tion, arrow.

Parked-car ventilation The concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec essary. The switch-on time is automatically deter mined based on the temperature. The system promptly switches on before the selected de parture time. The system can be switched on and off di rectly or by using two preset switch-on times. It remains switched on for 30 minutes. The system can be switched on and off di rectly or by using two preset departure times. Operation can be performed via iDrive.

Functional requirements

Parked-car ventilation Using the preset departure time or when

operated directly: any external tempera ture.

Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate comf. ventilation"

The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes if the system is switched on. The system continues to run for some time af ter being switched off.

Preselecting the departure time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Dep. time 1:" or "Dep. time 2:" 4. Set the desired time.

Activating the departure time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate depart. time 1" or "Activate

depart. time 2" The symbol on the automatic climate con

trol lights up when the departure time is acti vated.

Seite 166

Controls Climate control

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reacti vated.

Seite 167

Climate control Controls

167 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Interior equipment Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Integrated universal remote control The concept The integrated universal remote control can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The integrated universal remote con trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans mitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote con trol.

During programming During programming and before activat

ing a device using the integrated universal re mote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packag ing or in the instructions of the system to be controlled, the system is gener

ally compatible with the integrated universal remote control. If you have any questions, please contact: Your service center. www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of John son Controls, Inc.

Controls on the interior rearview mirror

LED, arrow 1. Buttons, arrow 2. The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re

quired for programming.

Programming

General information 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This

Seite 168

Controls Interior equipment

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

erases all programming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The required distance de pends on the manual transmitter.

4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be program med on the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the interior rearview mirror will be gin flashing slowly.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. When the LED is flashing faster, this indicates that the but ton on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance be tween the interior rearview mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distan ces may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec onds.

6. To program other functions on other but tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the inte rior rearview mirror buttons.

Special feature of the alternating- code wireless system If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features an alternat ing-code system. Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear

view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system features an alternating-code system. Flashing and continuous illumination of the LED will re peat for approximately 20 seconds. For systems with an alternating-code system, the integrated universal remote control and the system also have to be synchronized. Please read the operating manual of the sys tem being set up for information on how to synchronize the system. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec ond person. To synchronize:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this work step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once syn chronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror

button to be programmed. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED

starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.

Seite 169

Interior equipment Controls

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held trans mitter.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap idly. When the LED is flashing faster, this indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior rearview mirror. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec onds.

Controls Before operation Before operating a system using the

integrated universal remote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the range of movement of the remote- controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear view mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior rear view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig nal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap

proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter Front

Opening

Press on the cover.

Emptying

Place your finger in the depression next to the ashtray, arrow, and push up at the same time. The ashtray can be removed.

Lighter Push in the lighter. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Seite 170

Controls Interior equipment

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.

Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.

Rear

Opening

Press on the cover.

Emptying Take out the insert.

Lighter

Push in the lighter.

Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.

Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Connecting electrical devices Hints

Do not plug chargers into the socket Do not connect battery chargers to the

factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the battery.

Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.

Sockets The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run ning or when the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.

Seite 171

Interior equipment Controls

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Front center console

Press on the cover. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the front passenger footwell

Socket is located below the glove compart ment. To access the socket: fold open the cover.

Rear center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the cargo area Remove the cover.

USB interface for data transfer The concept Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.: Personal Profile settings, refer to page 31. Music collection, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communi cation.

Without Professional navigation system or TV: at a glance

The USB interface is located in the center arm rest.

Without Professional navigation system or TV: at a glance

The USB interface is located in the glove com partment.

Notes Observe the following when connecting:

Seite 172

Controls Interior equipment

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface.

Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface.

Do not connect USB hard drives. Do not use the USB interface to recharge

external devices.

Rear cooler Behind the center armrest

The cooler is located behind the center arm rest in the rear. Fold the center armrest down.

Opening

Pull on the opener and fold the cooler forward.

Switching on The cooler can be operated at two levels.

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the button once for each cooling level. The highest cooling power is active when two LEDs are lit.

If the cooler was switched on the last time the ignition was switched on, it will likewise be switched on the next time the ignition is switched on.

Switching off Press the button repeatedly until the LEDs go out.

Malfunction The cooler cannot be switched on or switches off, e.g., when the cooling system overheats or if the battery voltage is low. One of the LEDs flashes.

Remedy the problem 1. If necessary, allow the refrigerator cooling

system to cool down. 2. Start the engine. 3. Switch on cooler. If the LED flashes even after a short time, have the cooler checked by the service center.

Folding table in the rear A folding table is contained in the backrest of the front seat.

Folding down Pinch hazard during folding out and in Make sure that the area of movement

around the folding table and the side hinges is clear; otherwise, injuries can occur.

Seite 173

Interior equipment Controls

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Pulling on the handle, draw the table up and out and fold it down.

Keep the folding table closed when driv ing

While driving, keep the folding table closed as much as possible; otherwise, there is a danger of injury from the folding table or from objects on the folding table.

Ski bag Capacity The ski bag can be used to transport up to three pairs of skis with a length of up to 6 ft/2.10 m or a snowboard of up to 5 ft/1.60 m.

Preparing and loading the ski bag 1. Fold open the center arm rest and the lid

on the inside. 2. Open the inside cover and cargo area by

pressing the button.

3. Lay out the ski bag.

4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the sharp edges of the skis.

5. Insert the tongue plate into the belt buckle.

6. Tighten the retaining strap.

Securing the ski bag Secure the ski bag by tightening the re

taining strap; otherwise, the contents could present a source of danger to the passengers, for example during braking or evasive maneu vers.

Removing the ski bag The ski bag can be removed entirely, e.g., to dry quickly or to use other inserts.

Seite 174

Controls Interior equipment

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

1. Pull the handle forward and lift the ski bag out.

2. Close the cover in the cargo area. More information on the various inserts availa ble can be obtained from your service center.

Seite 175

Interior equipment Controls

175 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Storage compartments Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Notes No loose objects in the passenger com partment

Do not stow any objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; other wise, they may present a danger to occupants for instance during braking and avoidance ma neuvers.

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash board

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. The mat materials could damage the dash board.

Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail able in the vehicle interior: Glove compartment on the driver's and

front passenger side, refer to page 176. Storage compartment in the center arm

rest, refer to page 177, in the front and rear.

Compartments in the doors. Pockets on the backrests of the front

seats. Net in the front passenger footwell.

Glove compartment Front passenger side

Note Close the glove compartment again im mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc cur during accidents.

Opening

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing Fold up the cover.

Opening the top cover

Press the button.

Seite 176

Controls Storage compartments

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

The top cover opens automatically.

Closing the top cover Press the cover closed.

Driver's side

Note Close the glove compartment again im mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc cur during accidents.

Opening

Pull the handle.

Closing Fold up the cover.

Center armrest Front A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats.

Opening

Press the buttons next to the lock.

Locking the storage compartment

The storage compartment in the armrest can be locked with an integrated key to separately secure the trunk lid, refer to page 39, for exam ple.

After the storage compartment is locked, the remote control can be handed out without the integrated key, refer to page 30, for instance at a hotel. This prevents access to the storage compart ment and to the cargo area.

Connection for an external audio device

. Description, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication.

Seite 177

Storage compartments Controls

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Rear A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats.

Opening Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, the button is in the depression at the front of the center armrest or on top of the center arm rest.

Cupholders Hints

Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.

Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con

tainers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.

Front

To open: press on the cover.

Rear In the front of the center armrest.

To open: press the button. To close: slide back.

Clothes hooks The clothes hooks are located next to the grab handles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear.

Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv er's vision.

No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the

hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma neuvers.

Cargo area Net Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the side of the cargo area. To transport larger objects, it can be pushed down.

Seite 178

Controls Storage compartments

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Storage compartment under the cargo floor panel

Raise the cargo floor panel.

Storage compartment on the side

Under the cover on the side of the cargo area is a storage compartment that can be used to store the printed Owner's Manual, for example. Remove the cover.

Lashing eyes To secure the cargo, refer to page 186, there are lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Seite 179

Storage compartments Controls

179 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Driving tips This chapter provides you with information

useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Things to remember when driving Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Breaking-in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other. The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differential Always obey the official speed limit.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum stances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breaking- in period. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes Closing the trunk lid

Drive with the trunk lid closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other

wise, in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road users may be injured, and the vehicle may be damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en ter the passenger compartment.

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: Close all windows and the glass sunroof. Greatly increase the blower speed. Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system during driving, while in idle po

Seite 182

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri ous personal injury as well as property dam age. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Climate control windshield

The marked area is not covered with heat re flective coating. Use this area for garage door openers, devices for electronic toll collection, etc.

Climate control laminated tinted safety glass The vehicle glass provides full protection against the harmful effects of UV radiation on the skin.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve hicle

It is advised that you do not use mobile com munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, in side the vehicle without connecting them di rectly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle electronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addi tion, there is no assurance that the radiation generated during transmission will be dis charged from the vehicle interior.

Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, re

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.

Driving through water Drive though calm water only and only if it is not deeper than. 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.

Adhere to water depth and speed limita tions

Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.

Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand ard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces sary. The vehicle maintains steering responsive ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Seite 183

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Objects in the area around the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again after they were removed for clean ing, for example.

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet coated with road salt or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pres sure on the brake pedal every few miles. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi ciency. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if necessary.

Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the

brake system. Light but consistent brake pres sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine

stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist is un available with the engine stopped.

Brake disc corrosion The corrosion on the brake discs and the con tamination on the brake pads are furthered by: Low mileage. Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all. Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef fect that generally cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops that exits under neath the vehicle. Traces of water under the vehicle like this are normal.

Seite 184

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Loading Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Hints Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved carry

ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.

No fluids in the trunk Make sure that fluids do not leak into the

trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam aged.

Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve hicles placard: The combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the

vehicle and unstable driving situations may result.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca pacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi cle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Seite 185

Loading Driving tips

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Stowing cargo Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo. Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi

ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.

Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Securing cargo Smaller and lighter items: secure with re

taining straps or with a cargo net or draw straps.

Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps.

Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or draw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Securing cargo Always position and secure the cargo as

described above; otherwise, it can endanger the car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving becomes necessary.

Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu pants.

Roof-mounted luggage rack Note Installation only possible in roof drip molding with flaps. Your service center will be glad to advise you. Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Securing Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Roof drip rail with flaps

On the roof drip rail, press on the outside of the flap.

Mounting The preparation for the mounting plate is lo cated below the roof drip rail. Have the mount ing plate installed by the service center before installation of a roof rack. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.

Magnetic roof-mounted luggage rack Because of the aluminum roof, magnetic roof- mounted luggage racks cannot be used.

Seite 186

Driving tips Loading

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Loading Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef fect on vehicle handling and steering re sponse. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.

Distribute the roof load uniformly. The roof load should not be too large in

area. Always place the heaviest pieces on the

bottom. Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie

with ratchet straps. Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the trunk lid. Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler

ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Seite 187

Loading Driving tips

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Saving fuel Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors. The implementation of certain measures, driv ing style and regular maintenance can have an influence on fuel consumption and on the envi ronmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following use Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.

Tires General information Tires can affect fuel consumption values in various ways, for instance fuel consumption can be influenced by the size of the tires.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla tion pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi cle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption.

Seite 188

Driving tips Saving fuel

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion.

Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop. If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec onds of switching off the engine. Using this system can cause certain compo nents of the vehicle to become worn prema turely. In addition, fuel consumption is also deter mined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic. Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed.

Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by your service center. Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys tem, refer to page 216.

ECO PRO The concept ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en gine control and comfort functions, e. g. the climate control output, are adjusted. Under certain conditions the engine is auto matically decoupled from the transmission when transmission position D is engaged. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmis sion position D remains engaged. In addition, context-sensitive instructions can be displayed that assist in driving in a manner that optimizes fuel consumption. The extension of the range that is achieved as a result can be displayed in the instrument cluster.

At a glance The system includes the following EfficientDynamics functions and displays: ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 190. ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to

page 191 ECO PRO climate control, refer to

page 190. ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to

page 192.

Seite 189

Saving fuel Driving tips

189 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Activating ECO PRO Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO

Via the Driving Dynamics Control 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" 3. Configure the program.

Via the iDrive 1. "Settings" 2. "ECO PRO mode" Or

1. "Settings" 2. "Driving mode" 3. "Configure ECO PRO" Configure the program.

ECO PRO Tip "Tip at:":

Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO Tip is to be displayed.

"ECO PRO speed warning": A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO speed is exceeded.

Coasting Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag ing the engine and Coasting, refer to page 192, with the engine idling. This function is only available in ECO PRO mode.

ECO PRO climate control "ECO PRO climate control" The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi cient.

By making a slight change to the set tempera ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the passenger compartment, fuel consumption can be economized. The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior mirror heating are also reduced. The exterior mirror heating is made available when outside temperatures are very cold.

ECO PRO potential The percentage of potential savings that can be achieved with the current configuration is displayed.

Display in the instrument cluster

Display in the instrument display When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display switches to a special configuration. Some of the displays may differ from the dis play in the instrument cluster.

ECO PRO bonus range An extension of the range can be achieved by an adjusted driv ing style. This may be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument

cluster. The bonus range is shown in the range display. The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.

Seite 190

Driving tips Saving fuel

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Driving style

In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display in dicates the current efficiency of the driving style. Mark in the CHARGE area, arrow 1: display for energy recovered by coasting or when braking. Mark in the POWER area, arrow 2: display when accelerating. The efficiency of the driving style is shown by the color of the bar: Blue display: efficient driving style as long

as the mark moves within the blue range. Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by

backing off the accelerator pedal. The display switches to blue as soon as all conditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving are met.

ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction The arrow indicates that the driving style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for instance.

Note The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO display is activated. Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:

1. "Settings" 2. "Info display"

3. "ECO PRO Info" In the instrument display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Driving mode view"

ECO PRO tip - Symbols An additional symbol and a text instruction are displayed.

Symbol Measure

For efficient driving style, back off the accelerator or delay accelerating to allow time to assess road condi tions.

Reduce speed to the selected ECO PRO speed.

Automatic transmission: switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions.

Indications on the Control Display

EfficientDynamics Information on fuel consumption and technol ogy can be displayed during driving.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "EfficientDynamics"

Displaying fuel consumption history The average fuel consumption can be dis played within an adjustable time frame. Vertical bars show consumption for the se lected time frame. Trip interruptions are represented below the bar on the time axis.

"Consumption history"

Seite 191

Saving fuel Driving tips

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Adjusting fuel consumption history time frame

Select the symbol.

Resetting fuel consumption history 1. Open "Options". 2. "Reset consumption history"

Displaying EfficientDynamics info The current efficiency can be displayed.

"EfficientDynamics info" The following systems are displayed: Automatic engine start-stop function. Energy recovery. Climate control output. Coasting.

Display ECO PRO tips and forward view

"ECO PRO Tips" The driving instruction for decelerating in ad vance and an additional symbol show the up coming route section. The setting is stored for the profile currently in use.

Coasting

The concept The system helps to conserve fuel. To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmis sion when transmission position D is engaged. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmis sion position D remains engaged. This driving condition is referred to as coast ing. As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is depressed, the engine is automatically coupled to the transmission again.

Hints Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re fer to page 189, driving mode. Coasting is automatically activated when ECO PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 130. The function is available in a certain speed range. A forward-looking driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and supports the fuel-conserving effect of coast ing.

Safety mode The function is not available if one of the fol lowing conditions is satisfied. DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. Driving in the dynamic limit range and on

steep uphill or downhill grades. Battery charge status temporarily too low

or vehicle electrical system drawing exces sive current.

Cruise control activated.

Functional requirements In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if the following conditions are satisfied: Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not

operated. The selector lever is in transmission posi

tion D. Engine and transmission are at operating

temperature.

Seite 192

Driving tips Saving fuel

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Display

Display in the instrument cluster The mark in the bar display be low the tachometer is backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The tachometer approxi mately indicates idle speed.

The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the zero point during coasting.

Indications on the Control Display The Coasting driving condition is displayed in EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode is active.

Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2: driving condition Coasting.

Displaying EfficientDynamics info 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "EfficientDynamics" 3. "EfficientDynamics info"

Deactivating the system manually The function can be deactivated in the Config ure ECO PRO, refer to page 190, menu, e.g., to use the braking effect of the engine when trav eling downhill. The setting is stored for the profile currently in use.

Seite 193

Saving fuel Driving tips

193 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Mobility In order to always ensure your mobility, you will

find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside

Assistance in the following.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Refueling Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

General information Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.

Fuel cap Opening 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler

flap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing 1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex ample.

Seite 196

Mobility Refueling

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise

fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ ment and damaging the vehicle.

Handling fuels Obey safety regulations posted at the

gas station.

Seite 197

Refueling Mobility

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Fuel Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Fuel recommendation Gasoline For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con taining metal must not be used.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with out metallic additives.

Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other components.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards: US: ASTM 4806xx CAN: CGSB-3.511xx xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

Do not refuel with ethanol E85 Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an

ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this would damage the engine and fuel supply system.

Gasoline quality BMW recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89.

Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini

mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per formance.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Fuel quality The use of poor-quality fuels may result

in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi tionally, problems relating to drivability, start ing and stalling, especially under certain envi ronmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we rec ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI num ber for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en gine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail ers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main tenance.

Seite 198

Mobility Fuel

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Wheels and tires Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Tire inflation pressure Safety information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres sure influence the following: The service life of the tires. Road safety. Driving comfort.

Checking the pressure Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pres

sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob serve this precaution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure: Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 200, contains all pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle. Maximum permitted driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 200, and adjust as necessary.

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other

wise, tire damage and accidents may result.

Seite 199

Wheels and tires Mobility

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

740i, 740Li, 750i, 750Li

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S RSC 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.3 / 33

Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC

2.4 / 35 -

- 2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38 -

- 3.0 / 44

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 18 104 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

760Li

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S RSC 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y RSC

2.3 / 33 -

- 2.3 / 33

Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36 -

- 2.5 / 36

Front: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC

2.8 / 41 -

- 2.9 /42

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 18 104 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

Seite 200

Mobility Wheels and tires

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

740Li xDrive, 750i xDrive, 750Li xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S RSC 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.3 / 33

Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36 -

- 2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC

2.8 / 41 -

- 3.0 / 44

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 18 104 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h In order to drive at maximum speeds in

excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Other wise tire damage and accidents could occur.

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

740i, 740Li, 750i, 750Li Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S RSC 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38

245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41

Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.3 / 33

Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC

2.4 / 35 -

- 2.6 / 38

Seite 201

Wheels and tires Mobility

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Front: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38 -

- 3.0 / 44

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 18 104 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/50 R 18 100 H M +S RSC

2.5 / 36 2.8 / 41

245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL RSC

2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y RSC

2.5 / 36 -

- 2.6 / 38

Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39 -

- 2.9 /42

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Front: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC

2.9 /42 -

- 3.4 / 49

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 18 104 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

760Li Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S RSC 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S RSC

2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41

245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL RSC

2.8 / 41 3.1 / 45

Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y RSC

2.5 / 36 -

- 2.5 / 36

Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39 -

- 2.7 / 39

Seite 202

Mobility Wheels and tires

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Front: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC

3.0 / 44 -

- 3.1 / 45

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 18 104 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/50 R 18 100 H M +S RSC

2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41

245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL RSC

2.8 / 41 3.1 / 45

Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y RSC

2.6 / 38 -

- 2.6 / 38

Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC

2.8 / 41 -

- 2.8 / 41

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Front: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC

3.2 / 46 -

- 3.2 / 46

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 18 104 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

740Li xDrive, 750i xDrive, 750Li xDrive Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S RSC 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S RSC

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL RSC

2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41

Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.3 / 33

Seite 203

Wheels and tires Mobility

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36 -

- 2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC

2.8 / 41 -

- 3.0 / 44

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 18 104 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S RSC 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S RSC

2.6 / 38 2.9 /42

245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL RSC

2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46

Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y RSC

2.4 / 35 -

- 2.5 / 36

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39 -

- 2.7 / 39

Front: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC

3.0 / 44 -

- 3.2 / 46

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 18 104 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

Tire identification marks Tire size 245/45 R 18 96 Y 245: nominal width in mm 45: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code 18: rim diameter in inches 96: load rating, not for ZR tires Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letter T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013

Seite 204

Mobility Wheels and tires

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 1013: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age DOT 1013: the tire was manufactured in the 10th week 2013.

Recommendation Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C All passenger car tires must conform to Fed eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi cantly from the norm due to variations in driv ing habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re quired by law.

Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.

RSC Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 208, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.

Seite 205

Wheels and tires Mobility

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Notes Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cush ioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de fects: Unusual vibrations during driving. Unusual handling such as a strong ten

dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over curbs, road damage, or similar things.

In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re

duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; other wise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If necessary, have the vehicle towed. Otherwise, tire damage can be life-threatening for vehicle occupants and other traffic partici pants.

Repair of tire damage For safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re sult.

Changing wheels and tires Mounting

Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center.

Seite 206

Mobility Wheels and tires

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Wheel and tire combination Information on the correct wheel-tire combina tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be obtained from your service center. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse, use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom

mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model. For example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body con tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter mine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi cle if they are mounted.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling.

New tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breaking- in period. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de

sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.

Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45 /+7 . Although so-called all-season M+S tires do provide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of per formance as winter tires.

Seite 207

Wheels and tires Mobility

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for

the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac cidents can occur.

Run-flat tires If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against switching wheels between the front and rear axles. This can impair the handling characteristics.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tires Label

RSC label on the tire sidewall. The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de gree. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss.

Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 104. Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 107.

Changing run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Snow chains Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle, classified as road-safe and recom mended. Consult your service center for more informa tion.

Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size:

Seite 208

Mobility Wheels and tires

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

245/50 R 18. 245/45 R 19. Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.

Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

Snow chain detection

The concept When using snow chains, settings should be made via the iDrive for the snow chains being applied. The snow chain detection system supports you by automatically showing the detected state on the Control Display. When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steering of the Integral Active Steering is deac tivated automatically. At speeds above the maximum permitted speed with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again auto matically.

Activating the status 1. "Settings" 2. "Tire chains" 3. "Tire chains installed"

Automatic detection If functioning properly: Snow chains are mounted. The setting is

not activated . After you drive a short distance, a Check Control message is shown and the state is activated automatically. Confirm the automatic activation.

Snow chains are not mounted. The setting is activated . At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check Control message is displayed. Deactivate the status manually.

If not functioning properly: Snow chains are mounted. The setting is

not activated . A Check Control message is not displayed. The automatic detection system is mal functioning. Activate the status manually.

Activating/deactivating rear axle steering If the status indicating that snow chains are in use is activated, the rear axle steering is deac tivated automatically. At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again, even though snow chains are in use.

Seite 209

Wheels and tires Mobility

209 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Engine compartment Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip

ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number 2 Jump-starting, negative terminal 3 Washer fluid reservoir 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

5 Oil filler neck. 760i/Li: filler neck is located under a flap.

6 Coolant reservoir, except 750i/Li and 760i/Li.

Hood Opening the hood

Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Seite 210

Mobility Engine compartment

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Never reach into the engine compart ment

Never reach into the intermediate spaces or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.

1. Pull the lever.

2. Press the release handle and open the hood.

3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.

Danger of injury when the hood is open There is a danger of injury from protrud

ing parts when the hood is open.

Closing the hood

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over im mediately and close it securely.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Seite 211

Engine compartment Mobility

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Engine oil Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions. When a sporty driving style is used, the engine oil consumption, for example, is clearly higher. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling.

Checking the oil level electronically Status display

The concept The oil level is monitored electronically during driving and shown on the Control Display. If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed.

Requirements Depending on the previous displays, the status display is displayed when the engine is running or after the vehicle has been driven for at least 30 minutes.

Displaying the oil level 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

Oil level display messages Different messages appear on the display de pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these messages. If oil level is too low, immediately add 1 US quart/liter of oil. Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immediately;

otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam age.

Detailed measurement

The concept In the detailed measurement the oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. During the measurement, the idle speed is in creased somewhat.

General information A detailed measurement is only possible with certain engines.

Requirements Automatic transmission: selector lever in

transmission position N or P and accelera tor not depressed.

Vehicle is on a level road and the engine is running at operating temperature.

Performing a detailed measurement In order to perform a detailed measurement of the engine oil level:

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

Seite 212

Mobility Engine oil

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

3. "Measure engine oil level" 4. "Start measurement" The oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Duration: approx. 1 minute.

Adding engine oil 760i/Li: open/close flap

When the flap is closed, it must latch

Filler neck

When the indicator lights up in the instrument cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.

Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil

dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.

Oil types for refilling Hints

No oil additives Oil additives may lead to engine dam

age.

Viscosity grades for engine oils When selecting an engine oil, ensure that

the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Some types of oils in some cases are not avail able in all countries.

Approved oil types

Gasoline engine

BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30.

BMW Longlife-01.

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

Additional information about the approved types of oils can be requested from the service center.

Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following specification can be added:

Gasoline engine

API SM or superior grade specification.

Seite 213

Engine oil Mobility

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Seite 214

Mobility Engine oil

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Engine oil change The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends having the engine oil changed by your service center.

Coolant Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

General information Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while

the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.

Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise,

engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.

Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service cen ter for suitable additives.

Coolant level If there is no Min. and Max. mark in the filler neck of the coolant reservoir, have the coolant level checked if necessary by your service cen ter and add coolant as needed.

Note Depending on the engine installation, the cool ant reservoir may be located on the opposite side of the engine compartment.

Checking 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir

slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex cess pressure to dissipate, and then open it.

3. The coolant level is correct if it lies be tween the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click. The arrows on the coolant reservoir and the cap must point towards one another.

6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi nated as soon as possible.

Seite 215

Coolant Mobility

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Maintenance Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

BMW Maintenance System The maintenance system directs you to re quired maintenance measures and thereby supports you in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle.

Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service deter mines the maintenance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile. Details on the service requirements, refer to page 87, can be displayed on the Control Dis play.

Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle. Therefore, hand your service specialist the re mote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently.

Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count. If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter.

Service history Perform maintenance work at the service cen ter and have them recorded in the vehicle data. The entries are like a service booklet of the documentation of regular maintenance. Displaying entered maintenance work on the Control Display, refer to page 88.

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty In formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els for additional information on service re quirements. Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have reg ular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els. These entries are proof of regular mainte nance.

Seite 216

Mobility Maintenance

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi cle emissions.

Emissions The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. Canadian model: warning light indi cates the engine symbol.

The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive mis firing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe riod can seriously damage emission con trol components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Fuel cap The indicator lamp lights up. If the fuel cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system may conclude that

fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tight ened, the display should go out in a short time.

Seite 217

Maintenance Mobility

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Replacing components Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in a fold-down cover in the trunk lid. Unscrew the wing nut to open.

Wiper blade replacement General information

Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.

Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer

to page 75, the wiper arms. 2. Fold up the wipers.

3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po sition.

4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.

5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place.

6. Fold down the wipers.

Lamp and bulb replacement Hints

Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu tion to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to

Seite 218

Mobility Replacing components

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

the service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here. You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center.

Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system,

you should always switch off the lights af fected to prevent short circuits. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover serve as the light source for controls, display elements and other equipment. These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.

Headlamp glass Condensation can form on the inside of the ex ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the conden sation evaporates after a short time. The head lamp glasses do not need to be changed. If the headlamps do not dim despite driving with the light switched on, increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service center check this.

Headlamp setting The headlamp adjustments can be affected by changing lamps and bulbs. Therefore after a change, have the headlamp setting checked and corrected by Service.

Xenon headlamps

At a glance

1 Corner-illuminating lamps 2 Parking lamp, daytime running lights 3 Low beams/high beams 4 Turn signal

Hints Because of the long life of these bulbs, the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life.

Seite 219

Replacing components Mobility

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 218. With Xenon-headlamps, the following lamps are designed with LED technology: Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps. Turn signals, incl. side indicators Daytime running lights Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Turning lamp with the Xenon headlamp Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 218. The illustration shows the left side of the en gine compartment.

55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Open the folding cover in the engine com partment.

2. Turn the cap and remove it.

3. Pull the connector off the bulb. 4. Squeeze the wire bracket together and de

tach.

5. Remove the bulb and replace it. 6. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in

the reverse order.

Seite 220

Mobility Replacing components

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

LED headlamps

At a glance

1 Corner-illuminating lamps 2 High-beams 3 Low-beams, daytime running lights 4 Turn signal, parking lamp, daytime running

lights 5 Side marker lamps

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 218. With LED headlamps, all front lamps and side indicators are designed with LED technology. If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

LED front fog lamps Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 218. These front fog lamps are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Tail lamps, bulb replacement

At a glance

1 Turn signal 2 Reversing lamp 3 Inside brake lamp 4 Tail lamp 5 Outside brake lamp

Turn signal, brake, tail, and license plate lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 218. These lights feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Lamps in the trunk lid Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 218.

Access to the lamps 1. Remove the three screws using the screw

driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit.

Seite 221

Replacing components Mobility

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

2. Fold away the cover.

3. Replace the defective bulb.

Inside brake lamp 21-watt bulb, H21W.

Pull out the bulb and replace it.

Reversing lamp 16-watt bulb, W16W.

Pull out the bulb and replace it.

Changing wheels Hints The vehicle equipment does not include a spare tire. When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated at the positions shown.

Lug bolt lock The lug bolt lock is in the onboard vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 218.

Seite 222

Mobility Replacing components

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Lug bolt, arrow 1. Adapter, arrow 2.

Removing 1. Attach the adapter to the wheel lug. 2. Unscrew the lug bolt. Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt back on.

Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec trolyte will last for the life of the battery. Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery.

Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries only Only use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa ble.

After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service cen ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available and that any Check Control mes sages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Charging the battery

Note Do not plug chargers into the socket Do not connect battery chargers to the

factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the battery.

General information Make sure that the battery is always suffi ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life. The battery may need to be charged in the fol lowing cases: When making frequent short-distance

drives. If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe

riods, longer than a month.

Starting aid terminals In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 227, in the engine compartment with the engine off.

Power failure After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reinitialized. Individual settings need to be reprogrammed: Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:

store the positions again. Time: update. Date: update. Radio station: saving new, see user's

manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication.

Navigation system: wait for the operability of the navigation.

Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy cling center.

Seite 223

Replacing components Mobility

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses Notes

Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substi tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re sulting in a fire in the vehicle.

Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the cargo area.

In the glove compartment

Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid, arrow 2.

In the cargo area

Open the cover on the right side trim.

Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.

Seite 224

Mobility Replacing components

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Breakdown assistance Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located in the center console.

Intelligent Emergency Request Requirements The radio ready state is switched on. The Assist system is functional. The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has

been activated. A ConnectedDrive contract is available.

General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

Hints Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency

Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor able conditions.

Initiating an Emergency Request

1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the

button lights up. The LED lights up: an Emergency Request

was initiated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab lished.

The LED flashes when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been estab lished. When the emergency request is received at the BMW Response Center, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum stances. For this purpose, data that are used to de termine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle

Seite 225

Breakdown assistance Mobility

225 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

if it can be established, are transmitted to the BMW Response Center.

If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Re sponse Center can no longer be heard via the speaker, you can nevertheless still be heard for the BMW Response Center.

Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re quest is automatically initiated immediately af ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the container on the inside of the trunk lid. Unscrew the wing nut to open.

First aid kit Note Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage

The first aid kit is located in the container on the inside of the trunk lid. Unscrew the wing nut to open.

Roadside Assistance Service availability Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain as sistance there in the event of a vehicle break down.

Roadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside Assistance can be established di rectly.

Jump-starting Notes If the battery is discharged, an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca bles with fully insulated clamp handles. To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce dure.

Seite 226

Mobility Breakdown assistance

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in

jury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor mation can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehicles Make sure that there is no contact be

tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other wise, there is the danger of short circuits.

Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct

order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.

The so-called starting aid terminal in the en gine compartment acts as the battery's posi tive terminal.

The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal.

Connecting the cables 1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter

minal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis tance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in creased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not success ful, wait a few minutes before making an

Seite 227

Breakdown assistance Mobility

227 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

other attempt in order to allow the dis charged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re

verse order. Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towing Transporting your vehicle

Note Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown.

Do not have the vehicle towed Have your vehicle transported on a load

ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc cur.

Tow truck

Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Towing other vehicles

General information Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter

than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle re sponse.

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow

fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.

Switch on the hazard warning system, de pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow.

Towing methods when towing other vehicles

Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: Maneuvering capability is limited during

cornering. The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is secured with an offset.

Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, al ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Seite 228

Mobility Breakdown assistance

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit

ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.

Tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting should always be car ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. It is located in the container on the inside of the trunk lid.

Tow fitting, information on use Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only. Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front

for maneuvering the vehicle only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.

Screw thread

Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.

Tow-starting

Note: Do not tow-start the vehicle. Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem edied.

Seite 229

Breakdown assistance Mobility

229 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Care Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Car washes Hints

Steam jets or high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 /60 . If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main tained. Holding them too close or using exces sively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure washer.

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high- pressure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g., Park Distance Control, for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Regularly remove foreign items such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter.

Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Automatic car washes

Hints Note the following: Give preference to cloth car washes or

those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.

Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms.

Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.

Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 75, to avoid unintentional wiper acti vation.

In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system. Follow the instruc tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 44.

Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.

Before driving into a car wash In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps:

1. Drive into the car wash. 2. Engage transmission position N. 3. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check-Control message is dis played.

Seite 230

Mobility Care

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash

Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; otherwise, the transmission position P is engaged and damages can result.

To start the engine:

1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button without step ping on the brake turns the ignition off. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in transmission position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Transmission position Transmission position P is engaged automati cally: When the ignition is switched off. After approx. 15 minutes.

Headlamps Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or

caustic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due

to insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur. Completely remove all residues on the win dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved.

Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi cles. Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health.

Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre quency and extent of your car care to these influences. Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored.

Leather care Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible.

Seite 231

Care Mobility

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. Suitable care products are available from the service center.

Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita ble interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on pants or

other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 /60 . Follow the manufac turer's instructions. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disk.

Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radia tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic ularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleansers.

When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping.

Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components These include: Imitation leather surfaces. Headliner. Lamp lenses. Instrument cluster cover. Matte black spray-coated components. Painted parts in the interior. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Lightly dampen the cloth with water. Do not soak the headliner.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.

Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry.

Seite 232

Mobility Care

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Carpets and floor mats No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again after they were removed for clean ing, for example.

Floor mats can be removed from the passen ger compartment for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensors/cameras To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Displays/screens Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber cloth.

Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household

cleansers. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit. Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa ces or electrical components. Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.

Long-term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months.

Seite 233

Care Mobility

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Reference This chapter contains the technical data and an

index that will quickly take you to the information you need.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Technical data Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip

ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Dimensions Width, height with roof-mounted aerial

1 Vehicle height: Vehicle height: 58.1 inches/1,476 mm L model: 58.5 inches / 1,487 mm

2 Vehicle width, without mirrors: 74.9 in ches / 1,902 mm

3 Vehicle width, with mirrors: 84.3 in ches / 2,142 mm

Seite 236

Reference Technical data

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Length, wheel base

1 Wheel base:120.9 inches/3,070 mm L model: 126.4 inches / 3,210 mm 2 Length:200.0 inches/5,080 mm

L model: 205.5 inches / 5,220 mm

Smallest turning circle Diameter: 40 ft/12.2 m xDrive dia.: 41 ft/12.5 m

L model dia.: 41.7 ft/12.7 m L model xDrive dia.: 42.7 ft/13.0 m

Weights

740i 740Li

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,545/2,515 5,635/2,556

Load lbs/kg 1,035/469 970/440

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,600/1,179 2,625/1,191

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,120/1,415 3,140/1,424

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 17.7/500 17.7/500

Seite 237

Technical data Reference

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

740Li xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,785/2,624

Load lbs/kg 970/440

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,755/1,250

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,155/1,431

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 17.7/500

750i 750Li

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,735/2,601 5,820/2,640

Load lbs/kg 1,035/469 950/431

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,755/1,250 2,780/1,261

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,140/1,424 3,155/1,431

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 17.7/500 17.7/500

750i xDrive 750Li xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,865/2,660 5,940/2,694

Load lbs/kg 1,035/469 950/431

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,865/1,300 2,890/1,311

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,150/1,429 3,195/1,449

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 17.7/500 17.7/500

760Li

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,065/2,751

Load lbs/kg 905/411

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,975/1,349

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,205/1,454

Seite 238

Reference Technical data

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

760Li

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 17.7/500

Capacities

US gal/liters Notes

Fuel tank 21.1 / 80 Fuel quality, refer to page 198

Windshield and headlamp washer system

1.3 / 5

Seite 239

Technical data Reference

239 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys

tem 125 ACC, Active Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 133 Activated-charcoal filter 163 Active Blind Spot Detec

tion 121 Active Cruise Control with

Stop & Go, ACC 133 Active Protection 122 Active roll stabilization, see

Dynamic Drive 128 Active seat, front 50 Active seat ventilation,

front 50 Active seat ventilation,

rear 53 Active Steering, integral 129 Adaptive brake assistant 125 Adaptive brake lights, refer to

Brake force display 122 Adaptive drive 128 Adaptive light control 96 Adaptive Light Control, bulb

replacement 220 Additives, oil 213 Adjust front seat 48 Adjusting, steering wheel 60 Adjustments, seats/head re

straints 48 After washing vehicle 231 Airbags 100 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 101 Air circulation, refer to Recir

culated-air mode 162 Air distribution, manual 161 Air drying, refer to Cooling

function 162

Air flow, automatic climate control 161

Air pressure, tires 199 Air vents, refer to Ventila

tion 163 Alarm system 42 Alarm, unintentional 44 All around the center con

sole 14 All around the headliner 15 All around the steering

wheel 12 All-season tires, refer to Win

ter tires 207 All-wheel-drive 127 Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 169 Alternative oil types 213 Ambient light 99 Antifreeze, washer fluid 76 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 125 Anti-slip control, refer to

DSC 125 Approved engine oils 213 Armrest, refer to Center arm

rest 177 Arrival time 92 Ashtray 170 Assistance, Roadside Assis

tance 226 Assistance when driving

off 125 Attentiveness assistant 123 AUTO H button, refer to Au

tomatic Hold 72 AUTO intensity 161 Automatic car wash 230 Automatic climate con

trol 160

Automatic Cruise Control with Stop & Go 133

Automatic Curb Monitor 59 Automatic deactivation, front

passenger airbags 102 Automatic headlamp con

trol 96 Automatic Hold 72 Automatic locking 42 Automatic recirculated-air

control 162 Automatic Soft Closing,

doors 36 Automatic Soft Closing, trunk

lid 37 Automatic tailgate 37 Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 76 AUTO program, automatic cli

mate control 161 AUTO program, intensity 161 Auto Start/Stop function 68 Average fuel consumption 91 Average speed 91 Axle loads, weights 237

B Backrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 49 Backrest, width 49 Back seats, adjusting 51 Backup camera 147 Band-aids, refer to First aid

kit 226 Bar for tow-starting/

towing 228 Basic position, rear seats 52 Battery replacement, vehicle

battery 223

Seite 240

Reference Everything from A to Z

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 30

Battery, vehicle 223 Belts, safety belts 54 Beverage holder, cu

pholder 178 Blinds, sun protection 45 BMW Assist, see user's

manual for Navigation, En tertainment and Communi cation

BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance sys

tem 216 Bonus range, ECO PRO 190 Bottle holder, refer to Cu

pholder 178 Brake assistant 125 Brake assistant, adaptive 125 Brake discs, breaking in 182 Brake force display 122 Brake lamps, brake force dis

play 122 Brake lamps, bulb replace

ment 221 Brake lights, adaptive 122 Brake pads, breaking in 182 Braking, hints 183 Breakdown assis

tance 225, 226 Breaking in 182 Brightness of Control Dis

play 94 Bulb replacement, rear 221 Bulb replacement, see lamp

and bulb replacement 218 Button, RES 136 Button, Start/Stop 66 Bypassing, refer to Jump-

starting 226

C California Proposition 65

Warning 7

Calling up mirror adjust ment 42

Calling up seat adjust ment 42

Calling up steering wheel ad justment 42

Camera, backup camera 147 Camera, care 233 Camera, Side View 150 Camera, Top View 151 Can holder, refer to Cu

pholder 178 Car battery 223 Car care products 231 Care, displays 233 Care, vehicle 231 Cargo 185 Cargo area lid 36 Cargo area, storage compart

ments 178 Cargo, securing 186 Cargo straps, securing

cargo 186 Car key, refer to Remote con

trol 30 Carpet, care 233 Car wash 230 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 182 CBS Condition Based Serv

ice 216 CD/Multimedia, see user's

manual for Navigation, En tertainment and Communi cation

Center armrest 177 Center console 14 Center-Lock, see button for

central locking 33 Central locking system 33 Central screen, refer to Con

trol Display 16 Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 7 Changing parts 218 Changing wheels 222

Changing wheels/tires 206 Check Control 83 Checking the oil level elec

tronically 212 Children, seating position 62 Children, transporting

safely 62 Child restraint fixing sys

tem 62 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 63 Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 62 Child safety locks 65 Child seat, mounting 62 Child seats 62 Chrome parts, care 232 Cigarette lighter 170 Cleaning, displays 233 Climate control 160 Climate control laminated

tinted safety glass 183 Climate control on head

liner 165 Climate control wind

shield 183 Clock 86 Closing/opening from in

side 36 Closing/opening via door

lock 35 Closing/opening with remote

control 34 Clothes hooks 178 Coasting 192 Coasting with engine decou

pled, coasting 192 Coasting with idling en

gine 192 Collision warning with braking

function 111 Collision warning with City

Braking function 109 Combination switch, refer to

Turn signals 73

Seite 241

Everything from A to Z Reference

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Combination switch, refer to Wiper system 74

COMFORT+ program, Driving Dynamics Control 131

Comfort Access 39 COMFORT program, Driving

Dynamics Control 131 Computer 91 Condensation on win

dows 161 Condensation under the vehi

cle 184 Condition Based Service

CBS 216 Configure driving mode 132 Confirmation signal 42 Congestion Assistant 139 ConnectedDrive, see user's

manual for Navigation, En tertainment and Communi cation

ConnectedDrive Services Control Display 16 Control Display, settings 93 Controller 16 Control systems, driving sta

bility 125 Convenient opening 34 Coolant 215 Coolant temperature 86 Cooler 173 Cooling function 162 Cooling, maximum 162 Cooling system 215 Corrosion on brake discs 184 Cruise control 142 Cruise control, active with

Stop & Go 133 Cruising range 86 Cupholder 178 Curb weight 237 Current fuel consumption 87

D Damage, tires 206

Damping Control, dy namic 128

Data, technical 236 Date 86 Daytime running lights 96 Defrosting, refer to Windows,

defrosting 161 Departure time, parked-car

ventilation 166 Destination distance 92 Digital clock 86 Dimensions 236 Dimmable exterior mirrors 59 Dimmable interior rearview

mirror 60 Direction indicator, refer to

Turn signals 73 Display in windshield 157 Display lighting, refer to In

strument lighting 98 Displays 79, 80 Displays, cleaning 233 Disposal, vehicle battery 223 Distance control, refer to

PDC 145 Distance information 158 Distance to destination 92 Divided screen view, split

screen 20 Door lock, refer to Remote

control 30 Doors, Automatic Soft Clos

ing 36 Downhill control 127 Drive-off assistant 125 Drive-off assistant, refer to

DSC 125 Driver assistance, see Intelli

gent Safety 108 Driving Assistant, see Intelli

gent Safety 108 Driving Dynamics Con

trol 130 Driving instructions, breaking

in 182 Driving mode 130

Driving notes, general 182 Driving stability control sys

tems 125 Driving tips 182 DSC Dynamic Stability Con

trol 125 DTC driving dynamics 126 DTC Dynamic Traction Con

trol 126 Dynamic Damping Con

trol 128 Dynamic Drive 128 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 125 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 126

E ECO PRO 189 ECO PRO, bonus range 190 ECO PRO display 189 ECO PRO displays 82 ECO PRO driving mode 189 ECO PRO mode 189 ECO PRO Tip - driving in

struction 191 EfficientDynamics 191 Electronic displays, instru

ment cluster 80 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to DSC 125 Emergency detection, remote

control 31 Emergency release, door

lock 36 Emergency release, fuel filler

flap 196 Emergency release, parking

brake 71 Emergency Request 225 Emergency service, refer to

Roadside Assistance 226 Emergency start function, en

gine start 31

Seite 242

Reference Everything from A to Z

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 39

Energy Control 87 Energy recovery 87 Engine, automatic Start/Stop

function 68 Engine, automatic switch-

off 68 Engine compartment 210 Engine compartment, work

ing in 210 Engine coolant 215 Engine idling when driving,

coasting 192 Engine oil 212 Engine oil, adding 213 Engine oil additives 213 Engine oil change 214 Engine oil filler neck 213 Engine oil temperature 85 Engine oil types, alterna

tive 213 Engine oil types, ap

proved 213 Engine start during malfunc

tion 31 Engine start, jump-start

ing 226 Engine start, refer to Starting

the engine 67 Engine stop 67 Engine temperature 85 Entering/exiting vehicle, as

sistance, steering wheel 60 Entering a car wash 230 Equipment, interior 168 ESP Electronic Stability Pro

gram, refer to DSC 125 Exchanging wheels/tires 206 Exhaust system 182 Exterior mirror, automatic

dimming feature 59 Exterior mirrors 58 External start 226 External temperature dis

play 86

External temperature warn ing 86

Eyes for securing cargo 186

F Failure message, refer to

Check Control 83 False alarm, refer to Uninten

tional alarm 44 Fan, refer to Air flow 161 Fault displays, refer to Check

Control 83 Filler neck for engine oil 213 Fine wood, care 232 First aid kit 226 Fitting for towing, refer to

Tow fitting 229 Flat tire, changing

wheels 222 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 103 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni

tor TPM 105 Flat tire, warning

lamp 104, 106 Flooding 183 Floor carpet, care 233 Floor mats, care 233 Folding table in the rear 173 Fold-out position, windshield

wipers 75 Foot brake 183 Front airbags 100 Front fog lamps 98 Front fog lamps, bulb replace

ment 221 Front passenger airbags, au

tomatic deactivation 102 Front passenger airbags, indi

cator lamp 102 Front passenger seat, adjust

ing 49 Front turn signals, refer to

Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 220

FTM Flat Tire Monitor 103

Fuel 198 Fuel cap 196 Fuel consumption, current 87 Fuel consumption, refer to

Average fuel consump tion 91

Fuel filler flap 196 Fuel gauge 85 Fuel quality 198 Fuel recommendation 198 Fuel, tank capacity 239 Fuse 224

G Garage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote control 168

Gasoline 198 Gasoline quality 198 Gear change, automatic

transmission 77 Gear shift indicator 88 General driving notes 182 Gentleman function 49 Glass sunroof, powered 46 Glove compartment 176 Gross vehicle weight, ap

proved 237 Gross weight, permissible for

trailer towing 237

H Handbrake, refer to Parking

brake 70 Hand-held transmitter, alter

nating code 169 Hazard warning flashers 225 HDC Hill Descent Con

trol 127 Head airbags 100 Headlamp control, auto

matic 96 Headlamp courtesy delay fea

ture 95

Seite 243

Everything from A to Z Reference

243 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Headlamp courtesy delay fea ture via remote control 34

Headlamp flasher 74 Headlamp glass 219 Headlamps, care 231 Headlamp washer system 74 Headliner 15 Head restraints 48 Head restraints, front 55 Head restraints, rear 56 Head-Up Display 157 Head-up Display, care 233 Heavy cargo, stowing 186 Height with roof-mounted

aerial, vehicle 236 High-beam Assistant 97 High beams 74 High beams/low beams, refer

to High-beam Assistant 97 Hill Descent Control

HDC 127 Hills 184 Hill start assistant, refer to

Drive-off assistant 125 Hints 6 Holder for beverages 178 Homepage 6 Hood 210 Horn 12 Hotel function, trunk lid 39 Hot exhaust system 182 HUD Head-Up Display 157 Hydroplaning 183

I Ice warning, refer to External

temperature warning 86 Icy roads, refer to External

temperature warning 86 Identification marks, tires 204 Identification number, refer to

Important features in the en gine compartment 210

iDrive 16

Ignition key, refer to Remote control 30

Ignition off 66 Ignition on 66 Indication of a flat

tire 104, 106 Indicator and warning

lamps 83 Individual air distribution 161 Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 31 Inflation pressure, tires 199 Inflation pressure warning

FTM, tires 103 Info display, refer to Com

puter 91 Initialization, Integral Active

Steering 129 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni

tor TPM 106 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 103 Instrument cluster 79 Instrument cluster, electronic

displays 80 Instrument display, multifunc

tional 80 Instrument lighting 98 Integral Active Steering 129 Integrated key 30 Integrated universal remote

control 168 Intelligent Emergency Re

quest 225 Intelligent Safety 108 Intensity, AUTO pro

gram 161 Interior equipment 168 Interior lamps 99 Interior lamps via remote con

trol 34 Interior motion sensor 43 Interior rearview mirror 59 Interior rearview mirror, auto

matic dimming feature 60 Internet page 6

Interval display, service re quirements 87

J Jacking points for the vehicle

jack 222 Joystick, automatic transmis

sion 77 Jump-starting 226

K Key/remote control 30 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 39 Key Memory, refer to Per

sonal Profile 31 Kickdown, automatic trans

mission 77 Knee airbag 100

L Lamp replacement, rear 221 Lamps 95 Lamps and bulbs 218 Lane departure warning 119 Lane margin, warning 119 Language on Control Dis

play 93 Lashing eyes, securing

cargo 186 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 63 Leather, care 231 LED front fog lamps, bulb re

placement 221 LED headlamps, Bulb re

placement 221 LED light 221 LEDs, light-emitting di

odes 219 Length, vehicle 237 Letters and numbers, enter

ing 21

Seite 244

Reference Everything from A to Z

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

License plate lamp, bulb re placement 221

Light alloy wheels, care 232 Light control 96 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 219 Lighter, rear 171 Lighting 95 Lighting, speaker 99 Lighting via remote con

trol 34 Light switch 95 Load 185 Loading 185 Lock, door 35 Locking/unlocking from in

side 36 Locking/unlocking via door

lock 35 Locking/unlocking with re

mote control 34 Locking, automatic 42 Locking, central 33 Locking, settings 41 Locking via trunk lid 37 Lock, power window 45 Locks, doors, and win

dows 65 Low beams 95 Low beams, automatic, refer

to High-beam Assistant 97 Lower back support 49 Lug bolt lock 222 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-

mounted luggage rack 186 Lumbar support 49

M Maintenance 216 Maintenance require

ments 216 Maintenance, service require

ments 87 Maintenance system,

BMW 216

Malfunction displays, refer to Check Control 83

Malfunction, self-leveling sus pension 130

Manual air distribution 161 Manual air flow 161 Manual brake, refer to Parking

brake 70 Manual mode, transmis

sion 78 Manual operation, backup

camera 148 Manual operation, door

lock 36 Manual operation, exterior

mirrors 59 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 196 Manual operation, Park Dis

tance Control PDC 145 Manual operation, parking

brake 71 Manual operation, Side

View 150 Manual operation, Top

View 151 Manual operation, trunk

lid 37 Marking on approved

tires 207 Marking, run-flat tires 208 Massage seat, front 50 Massage seat, rear 52 Master key, refer to Remote

control 30 Maximum cooling 162 Maximum speed, display 89 Maximum speed, winter

tires 208 Measure, units of 93 Medical kit 226 Memory for seat, mirrors,

steering wheel 57 Menu, EfficientDynamics 191 Menu in instrument clus

ter 90

Menus, operating, iDrive 16 Menus, refer to iDrive operat

ing concept 17 Messages, refer to Check

Control 83 Microfilter 163 Minimum tread, tires 206 Mirror 58 Mirror memory 57 Mobile communication devi

ces in the vehicle 183 Modifications, technical, refer

to Safety 7 Moisture in headlamp 219 Monitor, refer to Control Dis

play 16 Mounting of child restraint fix

ing systems 62 Multifunctional instrument

display 80 Multifunction steering wheel,

buttons 12

N Navigation, see user's manual

for Navigation, Entertain ment and Communication

Neck restraints, front, refer to Head restraints 55

Neck restraints, rear, refer to Head restraints 56

Neutral cleaner, see wheel cleaner 232

New wheels and tires 206 Night Vision with pedestrian

detection 116 No Passing Information 89 Nylon rope for tow-starting/

towing 228

O OBD Onboard Diagnosis 217 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di

agnosis 217

Seite 245

Everything from A to Z Reference

245 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Obstacle marking, rearview camera 149

Octane rating, refer to Gaso line quality 198

Odometer 86 Office, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication

Oil 212 Oil, adding 213 Oil additives 213 Oil change 214 Oil change interval, service

requirements 87 Oil filler neck 213 Oil types, alternative 213 Oil types, approved 213 Old batteries, disposal 223 Onboard monitor, refer to

Control Display 16 Onboard vehicle tool kit 218 Opening/closing the trunk lid

with no-touch activation 40 Opening and closing 30 Opening and closing, from in

side 36 Opening and closing via door

lock 35 Opening and closing, with re

mote control 34 Operating concept, iDrive 16 Optional equipment, standard

equipment 6 Outside air, refer to Auto

matic recirculated-air con trol 162

Overheating of engine, refer to Coolant temperature 86

Overtaking prohibitions 89

P Paint, vehicle 231 Parallel parking assistant 153 Park Distance Control

PDC 145

Parked-car ventilation 166 Parked vehicle, condensa

tion 184 Parking aid, refer to PDC 145 Parking assistant 153 Parking brake 70 Parking lamps 95 Parking lamps and roadside

parking lamps, refer to Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 220

Parking with Auto Hold 72 Passenger side mirror, tilting

downward 59 Pathway lines, rearview cam

era 148 PDC Park Distance Con

trol 145 Pedestrian detection, refer to

Night Vision 116 Pedestrian warning with city

braking function 114 People detection, refer to

Night Vision 116 Permissible axle load 237 Personal Profile 31 Pinch protection system,

glass sunroof 47 Pinch protection system, win

dows 44 Plastic, care 232 Power failure 223 Power sunroof, glass 46 Power windows 44 Pressure, tire air pres

sure 199 Pressure warning FTM,

tires 103 Profile, refer to Personal Pro

file 31 Programmable memory but

tons, iDrive 21 Protective function, glass

sunroof 47 Protective function, win

dows 44

Push-and-turn switch, refer to Controller 16

Q Queuing Assistant, see Con

gestion Assistant 139

R Radiator fluid 215 Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control 30 Radio ready state 67 Radio, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication

Rain sensor 75 Rear automatic climate con

trol 164 Rear axle steering 129 Rear cooler 173 Rear lamps 221 Rear seats, adjusting 51 Rear seats, basic position 52 Rear sockets 172 Rearview mirror 58 Rear window defroster 162 Recirculated-air mode 162 Recommended tire

brands 207 Refueling 196 Remaining range 86 Remote control/key 30 Remote control, malfunc

tion 35 Remote control, univer

sal 168 Replacement fuse 224 Replacing parts 218 Replacing wheels/tires 206 Reporting safety defects 9 RES button 136 Reserve warning, refer to

Range 86

Seite 246

Reference Everything from A to Z

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 106

Residual heat, automatic cli mate control 162

Retaining straps, securing cargo 186

Retreaded tires 207 Reversing lamp, bulb replace

ment 221 Roadside parking lamps 96 Roller sunblinds 45 Roll stabilization, refer to

Adaptive Drive 128 Roll stabilization, see Dy

namic Drive 128 RON gasoline quality 198 Roof load capacity 237 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 186 Rope for tow-starting/

towing 228 RSC Run Flat System Com

ponent, refer to Run-flat tires 208

Rubber components, care 232

Run-flat tires 208

S Safe braking 183 Safety 7 Safety belt reminder for driv

er's seat and front passen ger seat 54

Safety belts 54 Safety belts, care 232 Safety Package, refer to Ac

tive Protection 122 Safety switch, windows 45 Safety systems, airbags 100 Saving fuel 188 Screen, refer to Control Dis

play 16 Screwdriver 218

Screw thread for tow fit ting 229

Seat belts, refer to Safety belts 54

Seat heating, front 50 Seat heating, rear 53 Seating position for chil

dren 62 Seat, mirror, and steering

wheel memory 57 Seats 48 Seats, rear, adjusting 51 Seat ventilation, front 50 Seat ventilation, rear 53 See lamp and bulb replace

ment 218 Selection list in instrument

cluster 90 Selector lever, automatic

transmission 77 Self-leveling suspension, air

suspension 129 Self-leveling suspension,

malfunction 130 Sensors, care 233 Service and warranty 7 Service history 88 Service requirements, Condi

tion Based Service CBS 216

Service requirements, dis play 87

Service, Roadside Assis tance 226

Services, ConnectedDrive Settings, locking/unlock

ing 41 Settings on Control Dis

play 93 Settings, storing for seat, mir

rors, steering wheel 57 Shifting, automatic transmis

sion 76 Shift paddles on steering

wheel 78 Shoulder support 49

Side airbags 100 Side View 149 Signaling, horn 12 Signals when unlocking 42 Sitting safely 48 Size 236 Ski bag 174 Slide/tilt glass roof 46 Smallest turning circle 237 Smoker's package 170 Snow chains 208 Socket 171 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag

nostics 217 SOS button 225 Spare fuse 224 Speaker lighting 99 Specified engine oil

types 213 Speed, average 91 Speed limit detection, on

board computer 92 Speed limiter, display 89 Speed Limit Information 89 Speed limit in the com

puter 92 Split screen 20 SPORT+ - program, Dynamic

Driving Control 131 Sport automatic transmis

sion 78 SPORT program, driving dy

namics 131 Sport program, transmis

sion 78 Stability control systems 125 Start/stop, automatic func

tion 68 Start/Stop button 66 Start function during malfunc

tion 31 Starting the engine 67 Status display, tires 105 Status information, iDrive 20 Status of Owner's Manual 6

Seite 247

Everything from A to Z Reference

247 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

Steering, Integral Active Steering 129

Steering wheel, adjusting 60 Steering wheel heating 61 Steering wheel memory 57 Steptronic, automatic trans

mission 76 Stopping the engine 67 Storage compartments 176 Storage compartments, loca

tions 176 Storage, tires 208 Storing the vehicle 233 Summer tires, tread 206 Supplementary text mes

sage 84 Surround View 147 Suspension settings 130 Switch for Dynamic Driving

Control 130 Switch, refer to Cockpit 12 Symbols 6 SYNC program, automatic cli

mate control 162

T Tachometer 85 Tail and brake lamps 221 Tailgate 36 Tailgate, automatic 37 Tailgate opening/closing with

no-touch activation 40 Tailgate via remote con

trol 34 Tail lamps 221 Tail lamps, bulb replace

ment 221 Technical changes, refer to

Safety 7 Technical data 236 Telephone, see user's manual

for Navigation, Entertain ment and Communication

Temperature, automatic cli mate control 161

Temperature display, external temperature 86

Temperature, engine oil 85 Tempomat, refer to Active

Cruise Control 133 Terminal, starting aid 227 Text message, supplemen

tary 84 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 42 Theft protection, lug

bolts 222 Theft protection, refer to

Central locking system 33 Thermal camera, refer to

Night Vision 116 Tilt alarm sensor 43 Time of arrival 92 Tire damage 206 Tire identification marks 204 Tire inflation pressure 199 Tire inflation pressure moni

tor, refer to FTM 103 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 105 Tires, changing 206 Tires, everything on wheels

and tires 199 Tires, run-flat tires 208 Tire tread 206 Tone, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication

Tools 218 Top View 151 Total vehicle weight 237 Touchpad 18 Tow fitting 229 Towing 228 Tow-starting 228 TPM Tire Pressure Moni

tor 105 Traction control 126 TRACTION program, Dy

namic Driving Control 130 Transmission, automatic 76

Transporting children safely 62

Tread, tires 206 Trip computer 92 Triple turn signal activa

tion 74 Trip odometer 86 Trunk lid 36 Trunk lid, automatic 37 Trunk lid, emergency unlock

ing 39 Trunk lid, hotel function 39 Trunk lid, manual opera

tion 37 Trunk lid opening/closing with

no-touch activation 40 Trunk lid via remote con

trol 34 Turning circle 237 Turning circle lines, rearview

camera 148 Turn signals, operation 73 Turn signals, rear, bulb re

placement 221

U Unintentional alarm 44 Units of measure 93 Universal remote control 168 Unlock button, automatic

transmission 77 Unlocking/locking from in

side 36 Unlocking/locking via door

lock 35 Unlocking/locking with re

mote control 34 Unlocking, settings 41 Updates made after the edito

rial deadline 7 Upholstery care 232 USB interface 172

Seite 248

Reference Everything from A to Z

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

V Vanity mirror 60 Variable steering, Integral Ac

tive Steering 129 Vehicle battery 223 Vehicle battery, replac

ing 223 Vehicle, breaking in 182 Vehicle care 231 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle identification number,

refer to Identification num ber in the engine compart ment 210

Vehicle jack 222 Vehicle paint 231 Vehicle storage 233 Vehicle wash 230 Ventilation 163 Ventilation, refer to Parked-

car ventilation 166 Vertical Dynamic Control, re

fer to Dynamic Damping Control 128

Voice activation system 23

W Warning indicators 83 Warning lamps 83 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 83 Warning triangle 226 Washer fluid 76 Washer fluid reservoir, ca

pacity 239 Washer nozzles, wind

shield 75 Washer system 74 Washing, vehicle 230 Water on roads 183 Weights 237 Welcome lamps 95 Wheel base, vehicle 237 Wheel cleaner 232

Wheels, changing 206 Wheels, everything on wheels

and tires 199 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 103 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni

tor TPM 105 Width, vehicle 236 Window defroster, rear 162 Windows, powered 44 Windshield, climate con

trol 183 Windshield washer fluid 76 Windshield washer noz

zles 75 Windshield washer sys

tem 74 Windshield wiper 74 Windshield wipers, fold-out

position 75 Winter storage, care 233 Winter tires, suitable

tires 207 Winter tires, tread 206 Wiper blades, replacing 218 Wiper fluid 76 Wiper system 74 Wood, care 232 Word match concept, naviga

tion 22 Wrench 218

X xDrive 127 Xenon headlamps, bulb re

placement 219

Seite 249

Everything from A to Z Reference

249 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

More about BMW

bmwusa.com The Ultimate Driving

Machine

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 749 - VI/13

01 40

2 92

6 01

9 u

e

*BL2

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 740i Sedan BMW works, you can view and download the BMW 740i Sedan 7 Series 2013 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW 740i Sedan as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW 740i Sedan. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the BMW 740i Sedan 7 Series 2013 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This BMW 740i Sedan 7 Series 2013 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download BMW 740i Sedan 7 Series 2013 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print BMW 740i Sedan 7 Series 2013 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW 740i Sedan 7 Series 2013 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.